
COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 



Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive 
in 2011 witii funding from 
Tine Library of Congress 



littp://www.arcliive.org/details/indooroutdoorlianOObear 



HANDICRArX AND 
PECREATION TOR GIRLS 



THE BEARD BOOKS FOR GIRLS 

By LINA and ADELIA B. BEARD 



Handicraft and Recreation for Girls. IllustniteH. 
;^i.6o net (postage extra). 

What a Girl Can Make and Do. New Ideas tor 
Work and Play. Illustiated. $l.bo net. 

The American Girl's Handy Book ; or, How to 
Amuse Yourself and Othere. Illustrated. $1.00. 



THE BEARD BOOKS FOR BOYS 

By DANIEL C. BEARD 



The Jack of All Trades ; 01, New Ideas for American 
Boys. Illustrated by the author, ^l.oo. 

The Outdoor Handy Book. New and Cheaper 
Edition of The American Boy's Book of Sport. With 
illustrations bv the author. $2.00. 

The American Boy's Handy Book ; or, What to 
Do and How to Do it. With illustrations by the 
author. $2.00. 




Indoo 

and 
#^ Outdo 



-Handicraft 

AND 

RECREATION fOR GiRLS 





BY 

Lina Beard 
and 
Adelia B.Beard 

New\ork 

Charles Scribner's 

Sons 

4904 




OCT 14 1904 
^OoByrlehtEmrv , 

CLASS C^ XXo. No 



Copyright, 1904, by 
CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS 

Published, October, 1904 



.-3 37^^ 



SPECIAL NOTICE 

The publishers hereby give warning tliat the 
unauthorized printing of any portion of the text 
of this book, and the reproduction of any of the 
illustrations or diagrams, are expressly forbidden. 



PREFACE 

This book, like a girl's life, is divided into two parts : 
i ccupation and amusement, or handicraft and recreation. 

It is not equally divided, for handicraft is so much more 
ce play than work, and is so entertaining in itself, we find 
'ifiQculty in drawing a distinct line between that and recrea- 
tion. The one insists upon blending with the other and the 
book, after all, is a book of entertainment. 

With the old handicrafts coming back into favor and 
new ones constantly being brought forward, a girl's life 
may be full of delightful employment. To work with joy- 
ous enthusiasm and self-reliant energy, as well as to play 
with light-hearted enjoyment, cannot fail to make her sensi- 
ble, wholesome, and happy, and it is with this end in view 
that we have written and illustrated the book. Our wish 
is to help our girl friends to make the most of their girl- 
hood and to enjoy it to its fullest extent. 

We have had practical experience in the actual working 
out of all the various handicrafts and recreations, and there- 
fore give only that which we know can be well and easily 
done by the average girl. 

Thanks are due to the Delineator, Harper s Bazar, Woman s 



vi Preface 

Home Companion, and Good Housekeeping, for their courtesy 
in promptly returning for this work the original drawings 
and material used in their respective magazines. 

The Author. 

Flushing, August 2, 1904. 



CONTENTS 



PART I 
HANDICRAFT 



CHAPTER I. PAGE 

Spinning 3 

The Spinning-Wheel, 4 ; The Spindle, 5 ; The Distaff, 7 ; Thoroughly- 
Cleaned, 8; The Band, 8; To Adjust the Band, 9; The Flax, 10; 
Practice, 11 ; How to Spin, 12 ; When the Thread Breaks, 12. 

CHAPTER IL 
Weaving on a Home-made Loom 15 

The Pin Loom, 16; The Heddles, 17; The Shuttle, 19; To Adjust the 
Warp, 19; The Woof, 20; How to Weave a Miniature Navajo 
Blanket, 20 ; Blankets for Dolls' Beds, 26. 

CHAPTER HI. 

A Ball of Twine and What May Be Made of It 27 

Making a Little Hammock, 27; How to Tie the Twine, 29 ; A School- 
Bag, 31 ; Twine Curtains, 34. 

CHAPTER IV. 
An Armful of Shavings, and What to Do with Them 36 

Selecting the Shavings, 36; A Soft Little Basket, 36; How to Prepare 
the Shavings, 37; How to Weave the Shavings, 39; Bind the Edges, 
40 ; The Handle, 40 ; A Handkerchief Case, 41. 



viii Contents 

CHAPTER V. PAGE 

Primitive Reed Curtains : 43 

The Reeds, 43; Raw Material, 43; The Twine-Stick Weave, 44; The 
Finished Curtain, 46 ; Curtain-Bee Frolic, 48 ; Door-way Screens, 49. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Things to Make of Common Grasses 53 

A Grasshopper House, 53; A Doll's Hammock, 56; A Bouquet-Holder, 
58; Weaving a Napkin- Ring, 59. 

CHAPTER VH. 

Possibilities of a Clothes Line 62 

Adapted to Decoration, 62 ; Rope Wood- Basket, 62 ; Rope Net Fringe, 
65 ; The Tassels, 65. 

CHAPTER VHL 

How to Weave a Splint Basket 68 

The Material, 68 ; The Spokes, 68 ; The Weavers, 70 ; ^^'eaving the 
Basket, 71 ; Binding Off, 71 ; Trimming, 73. 

CHAPTER IX. 
Modelling in Tissue-Paper 75 

Modelling a Chicken, 75; A Turkev, 81; The Sturdv Little Elephant, 
83. 

CHAPTER X. 

Nature Study with Tissue-Paper f 86 

All Flowers from Squares and Circles, 86; The Best Models, 86; Ma- 
terial, 87 ; The Carnation, 87 ; How to Cut a Circle, 88 ; The Morning- 
Glory, 94; The Daffodil, 99. 

CHAPTER XL 

A New Race of Dolls 103 

Dolls of Substance and Form, 103; The Paper, 104; Making the Head, 
104; The Arms, 105; The Body, 105; The Legs, 106; The Feet and 
Shoes, 107; Doll's Hair, 106; The Dress, 108; The Cap, no. 



Contents ix 

CHAPTER XII. PAGE 

An Indian Encampment on a Pastry-Board 1 1 1 

The Ground, iii; The Wigwam, 112; Decorating the Wigwam, 114; 
The Fire, 114; The Doll Indian, 115; The War Head-Dress, 116; A 
Travois, 118; Pipe of Peace, 119; A Perfect Little Tomahawk, 120; 
The Chieftain's Shield, 120; Arrow-Heads and Arrows, 122; A Bow 
That Will Shoot, 124; The Doll Squaw, 125; Squaw's Chamois 
Gown, 125 ; Primitive Loom and Navajo Blanket, 125 ; Papoose, 
130; Cradle for Papoose, 13 J ; Indian Money, 131; Wampum Neck- 
lace, 131. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

A Toy Colonial Kitchen with Fac-simile Colonial Furnishings.. 133 

The Floor, 135; The Fireplace, 138; A Hair-pin Crane, 138; Little 
Dutch Oven, 139; Two Andirons, 141; The Fire, 142; Iron Pot, 143; 
The Peel, 144; The Toaster, 144; Pot-Hooks, 145; The Spinning- 
Wheel, 147; The Little Spinner, 150; The Costume, 150; Flint-Lock 
Rifle, 151; The Bellows, 153; Colonial Pewter Dish, 154; Grand- 
father's Clock, 155; Colonial Churn, 160. 

CHAPTER XIV. 
Little Paper Houses of Japan 162 

How the People Live, 162; The House, 162; The Floors, 167; The 
Fence, 168; The Gateway, 169; Birthday Festivals, 169; The Koi. 
171 ; x\ Kago, 172. 

CHAPTER XV. 

Some Odd Things in Russia 1 75 

The Coronation Cathedral, 175; Door- way, 177; Cupolas, 178; A Rus- 
sian Peasant Doll, 180; A Little Samovar, 182. 



CHAPTER XVL 

Pottery Without a Potter's Wheel 185 

Primitive Pottery, 185; The Clay, 187; Moulded on Baskets, 187; The 
Table, 188; The Roll, 189; To Coil the Clay, 189. 



X Contents 

CHAPTER XVII. PAGE 

Baby Alligators and Other Things of Clay 193 

The Head, 195; The Body, 196; The Tail, 196; Coat of Armor, 197; The 
Legs and Feet, 198 ; A Banana, 201 ; A Little Bust of Washington, 202. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 
Funny Little Apple Toys 206 

The Porcupine, 206; Sally Walker's Head, 208; Sally's Curls, 208; 
The Indian, 209; A Comical Little Jap, 211 ; An Apple Tower, 214. 

CHAPTER XIX. 
Marvel Pictures 215 

Mary, 215; Her Dress, 217; Sun-Bonnet, 218; How to Draw the Lamb, 
219; How to Make the Wool Grow, 219 ; How to Draw the Goose, 
221 ; How to Feather the Goose, 223. 



PART II 
RECREATION 



CHAPTER XX. 

Egg Games for the Easter Holidays 

Lifting for Pasch Eggs 227 

How to Prepare the Egg-Shells, 227 ; Hanging the Eggs, 228 ; The 
Players, 22S ; The Lifting, 229 ; The Egg Dance, 230 ; Placing the 
Eggs, 230 ; Dividing the Players, 230 ; The Dance, 230 ; The Re- 
ward, 231 ; Easter Angling, 231 ; Materials for the Game, 231 ; Fish- 
poles, 231 : Eggs, 232;. Rules of the Game, 234; Table Egg-Rolling, 
235- 



Contents xi 

CHAPTER XXI. PAGE 

May Day Amusements } 237 

How the May King and Queen Are Chosen, 237; Archery, 237; The 
Bows, 238 ; Arrows, 238 ; Floral Target, 240 ; Keeping Score, 243 ; 
May Baskets and Spring Flowers, 246; How to Erect the Pole, 249; 
Dressing the May-Pole, 250 ; The Balls, 252 ; The Game, 252. 

CHAPTER XXII. 
Hallowe'en Revels 254 

Gold Nuggets, 254; The Mine, 255; The Miners, 255; The Apple 
Witch, 256; Witche's Hair, 257; Hat, 257; Broom, 258; Ghost Writ- 
ing, 259; Four-Leaved Clover, 260; Apple-seed Fortune Telling; 
261 ; Fortune Bags, 262. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

The Magic Cloth and What It Will Do 264 

Magic in India, 264; A Jumping Frog, 264; The Hungry Birds, 267; 
To make the Children Talk, 268 ; Moving Peaces, 269 ; The High Note, 
270. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

Finger Plays for Little Folk 273 

The Teeter, 273; Church, 275; Steeple, 275; Open Door, 276; The 
People, 276; The Preacher, 277; Man Chopping Wood, 277; My 
Mother's Knives and Forks, 279 ; My Father's Table, 280 ; My Sister's 
Looking-Glass, 280; The Little Black Birds, 280; The Baby's Cradle, 
281 ; Chin Chopper Chin, 282 ; Build the Tower, 282 ; The Five Little 
Pigs, 285 ; Little Heads for Little Fingers, 285. 

CHAPTER XXV. 
How to Arrange Fresh Flowers 289 

Selecting the Flowers, 289 ; A Number of Nasturtiums, 290 ; Do not 
Crowd the Flowers, 290 ; Green Leaves with Flowers, 291 ; Color 
Schemes, 291 ; The Vases, 292 ; Colorless Transparent Vases, 292 ; 
Arrangement, 293 ; Flower Lifter, 294 ; Symmetry, 295 ; Wild 
Flowers, 295. 



xii Contents 



CHAPTER XXVI. page 

Open Air Play-Houses 298 

A Florida Play-House, 298 ; Palm Decorations, 298 ; Other Decorations, 
298; An Umbrella Play-House, 299; A Real Teepee, 302; An African 
Hut, 306; The Floral Tent, 307. 

CHAPTER XXVII. 
Keeping Stoke 308 

The Counter, 308; The Scales, 309; Groceries, 312; Vegetables, 312; 
Candy, 313; Wrapping Paper, 313 ; Money, 314; Paper Pocket-Books, 
314; Keeping Accounts, 316 ; Bars of Soap, 319; Butter Clay, 319. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 
A Frolic with the Roses 320 

Beauty of the Rose, 320; Rose Petal Fleet, 321; Green Leaf- Boats, 
322 ; The Lake, 323 ; A Little Rose Girl, 325 ; A Garden, 325 ; A 
Peach-blow Vase, 327; Candied Rose Petals, 327; Rose Petal Cap, 
328; Conventional Designs, 330; A Wreath of Roses, 332; A Rose 
Book, 332. 

CHAPTER XXIX. 
A Straw Ride Picnic 333 

The Season, 333 ; Games for the Wagon, "^1,2, ; Simon Says, 335 ; Bird 
Wish, 337; Lines to Be Recited Rapidly, 337; At the Grounds, 338; 
Chasing the Deer, 338 ; The Swing, 338 ; Teeter-Tarter, 338 ; The 
Dinner, 339 ; Dishes, 339 ; Camp-Fire, 342 ; After Luncheon, 342 ; 
Telling Stories, 343 ; Game of Menagerie, 343. 

CHAPTER XXX. 

A Paper Chase 345 

The Hares and Hounds, 345 ; The Start, 347 ; False Scents, 347 ; The 
Finish, 348 ; How to Dress, 348. 



PART I 
HANDICRAFT 




The spinning-wheel shall buzz and whirr. 



CHAPTER I 



SPINNING 




HERE is so much poetry, 
romance, and history as- 
'^t^ sociated with the distaff 
and spindle, and later 
with the old spinning- 
wheel, that we have looked 
upon them with a feeling 
almost of awe, certainly 
with a reverence for the 
gentle hands that spun so 
industriously generations 
ago. But it has now oc- 
curred to us that we too 
may set the wheel a-hum- 
ming, taking up with en- 
thusiastic eagerness the work laid down by our great- 
grandmothers so many years ago. The song of even the 
athletic girl will soon be like Martha's when she sings in 
the market-place : 

"I can spin, sir," 

and the wheel will no longer be set aside as a relic of an 
industry past and gone. 

All the old handicrafts are coming back again, and ere 
long we shall be as proud as the maids in Revolutionary 

3 



Handicraft for Girls 



times of our hand-spun and hand-woven fabrics. To be 
able to spin and weave is to be accomplished in the newest 
as well as the oldest of household arts. 

Is the old spinning-wheel in the attic, neglected and cov- 
ered \vitii dust, or in the parlor, decked in all its bravery of 
blue ribbons and snowy flax? Bring it out, wherever it 
may be, and for the first time in many years it shall buzz 
and whirr, whive a girl's slender fingers part the flax and a 
girl's light foot rests upon the treadle. Look well to 

The Wheel 

and see that none of its parts are missing. There must be 
the bench, of course, with its treadle and wheel, then the 
slender rod which is tied loosely at the lower end to the 
cross-piece of the treadle (Fig. i), and caught at the looped 









Fig. I. — The slender rod tied at the lower end. 



Fig. 2. — The looped upper 
end of the rod. 



upper end to the little, curved-metal crank that extends at 
right angles from one end of the wheel's axle (Fig. 2). 



spinning 



The tw() slanting uprights which hold the wheel in place 
are slotted at the upper ends, and in these slots rests the 
axle. A little peg, slipped through two holes in one of the 




Fig. 3. — A little peg slipped through two holes. 

uprights, keeps the axle from slipping out of place (Fig. 3). 
The frame that holds 

The Spindle 

belongs in the position shown in the illustration of the 
spinning-wheel. By turning the handle that extends out 
from the upper end of the bench this frame may be moved 
slightly forward or backward when it is necessary to loosen 
or tighten the band on the wheel. 

In the two uprights of the spindle-frame there must be 



Handicraft for Girls 




^ 



leather rings like Fig. 4, one ring in each upright. The 
narrow strip extending outward from the ring is pushed 

through the hole in 

the upright, and the 

edge of the ring fitted 

into the little grooves 

just above and below 

one of the holes (Fig. 

5). These two leather 

rings hold the ends of 

the spindle, which 

can be easily taken 

out and put in by 
bending one of the rings backward or 
slightly turning one of the uprights. 
Fig. 6 shows the spindle with the spool, 
or bobbin, and the small, double-grooved 
wheel. The spindle proper is simply 
the metal rod and horseshoe-shaped 
piece of wood with its two rows of 



Fig. 4. — The leather rings. 




Fig. 5. — One ring in each 
upright. 




Fig. 6. — The spindle. 



spinning 



7 



little hooks or teeth. Besides the wheel and spindle there 
must be 

The Distaff 

and the arm that holds it. The arm is an upright with a 
rod extending out at right angles from the upper end. The 
lower end of the upright is slipped into a hole at one cor- 
ner of the highest part of the bench. 

The distaff, which the mountaineers of Kentucky call 
the " rock," is a thing you can make for yourself if your 
wheel happens to have lost its own. Many are cut from the 





Fig. 7. — The tip of your Christmas 
tree for a distaff. 



Fig. 8. — Bring the four branches 
up and tie at the top. , 



top points of pine-trees which grow like Fig. 7, and dog- 
wood also is sometimes used. The tip of your Christmas 
tree will be just the thing. Strip off the bark, bring the 
four branches up, and tie at the top to the middle stem (Fig. 
8). Let the lower end of the stem extend about four inches 
below the branches and whittle it down to fit in the hole in 
the distaff-arm. 

These are all the parts of the spinning-wheel, but before 



8 



Handicraft for Girls 



you can "see the wheels go round" every piece of metal 
must be 



Thoroughly Cleaned 

and freed from rust. Rub first with kerosene oil and then 
with the finest emery paper. Be very careful in polishing 
the teeth that you do not bend or break them, as it will 
not be easy to have them replaced. In fact, it is difficult 
to replace an}- part of the wheel, and though it has 
lasted several generations, careless handling may put it past 

repair. 

When the cleaning is finished, 
grease with lard the parts where 
there is any friction. The slots 
that hold the axle, the spindle- 
stem, and the metal arm, where the 
treadle-rod rests upon it, all need 
lubricating. 
The best 






Band for the Wheel 



is hand spun, but at present it is 
possible to obtain them only of old- 
fashioned spinners who make their 
own bands. You can, however,make 
a band of cotton cord, such as is 

Fig. 9 
The length of 
cord for a wheel measuring eighteen 

and a half inches in diameter is about ten feet five inches. 

This allows for a lap of one inch at the joint. Sew together 



Fig. 9. 



-Proper size of cord for 
wheel band. 



used for cording dresses, 
gives the exact size. 



spinning 9 

with silk, wrapping and sewing until the joint is almost 
invisible. 



To Adjust the Band 

loop it together, making 
it double (Fig. 10), lift the 
wheel from the sockets, and 
slip the band over it. Fit 
one part of the band into 
one of the grooves of the 
wheel, the other part into 
the other groove, allowing 
it to cross at the bottom 
(Letter B, Fig. 11). Take 
the spindle from its frame 




Fig. lo. — Make a double loop. 



and fit the bands into the 




Fig. II. — The band will cross at the bottom. 



groove in the end of the bobbin (Letter C, Fig. 6) and 
into the first groove in the small wheel (Letter D, Fig. 6). 



lO 



Handicraft for Girls 



The Flax 

may be obtained from any linen-thread factory and can be 
bought by the pound or half-pound. It is graded by color, 
the darkest being- the cheapest and the whitest the most 




The spinning-wheel. 



expensive. For practice-work the cheapest is as g-ood as 
the more expensive. When you have learned to spin a fine, 
even thread you may choose the color in reference to the 
article you intend to make. 



spinning 1 1 

Open your hank of flax, take part of it, and spread 
thinly over the distaff, wrapping- it around and around. 
Put on several layers, each almost as thin as a spider-web, 
extending it out widely and smoothly each time. 

You may think the ribbon tied on the distaff of your 
parlor wheel is merely for ornament, but it is not. The 
bands hold the flax in place while it is being spun, and 
a crisp, dainty, pretty-colored ribbon is just as useful for 
the purpose as one that is old and faded, and it is far pret- 
tier to look upon. Wrap the ribbon around the flax on the 
distaff, beginning at the bottom, cross it, and tie as shown in 
illustration of the spinning-wheel. 

Though everything is ready, before attempting to 
spin, 

Practice, 

simply working the treadle until you can manage that part 
of the work mechanically and give your whole attention to 
your hands. 

It seems a simple thing to work the treadle, but you will 
find that without previous practice you will forget to make 
your foot go in the absorbing interest of getting the flax 
ready to run on the spindle. Curb your impatience a little 
while therefore, and resolutely turn the distaff, with its 
pretty load, away from you. Place one foot on the treadle, 
give the large wheel a turn to the right, or away from the 
spindle, and try to keep a steady, even motion with your 
foot. The jerks caused by uneven pedalling will always 
break the thread, so you must learn to make the wheel turn 
smoothly and easily, without hurry and without stopping. 
Some spinners place only the toe of the foot on the treadle, 
others rest on it the heel also ; it matters little which 



12 Handicraft for Girls 

method you adopt so long as the wheel turns evenly. When 
you are quite satisfied that you can keep the wheel going 
without giving it a thought you may begin 

To Spin. 

From the lowest ends of the flax draw down several 
strands and twist them with 3'our fingers into a thread long 
enough to reach easily the bobbin on the spindle. Pass the 
end of the thread through the hole in the end of the spindle 
nearest to you (Letter A, Fig. 6), cai"ry it across and over 
the upper row of teeth and tie to the bobbin (Fig. 6). Start 
your wheel going, and, forgetting the action of 3'Our foot, 
give your undivided attention to drawing out the flax. 
Hold the strands lightl}' with )^our left hand and with your 
right keep constantly pulling them down and at the same 
time twisting them slightly. See illustration on first page. 
All this time 3'Ou must keep the flax from matting and tan- 
gling and the twist from running up into the mass of flax on 
the distaff. Only practice will make perfect in this work, 
though the knack may come suddenlv and you will wonder 
at your first clumsy attempts. The little fluster and excite- 
ment one feels in beginning and the hurry to get the flax 
into shape for the spindle is a drawback that practice will 
also overcome. 

When the Thread Breaks, 

as it will again and again at first, thread yovxr spindle as 
before, tie the new thread to the broken end and begin 
once more. A better way to mend the thread when you 
are reallv doing good work is to unwind a little from 
the bobbin, thread it backward through the spindle, bring 



Spimiing 1 3 

the end up to meet the end from the distaff, and let the 
two lap three or four inches ; then moisten your fingers 
and twist the threads together, making one thread 
again. 

Moistening the Fingers 

occasionally is a good thing while twisting, as it makes a 
smoother thread. In the old days the spinner kept a cocoa- 
nut-shell, filled with water, tied to the lower part of the 
spindle-frame, into which she daintily dipped the tips of her 
fingers when necessary. A finger-bowl or cup of water 
near by will answer the same purpose. 




"^^^^^dx^ 



0-X°3 X^iLQJv()L.^-^ 



The little girl and the little loom. 



14 




CHAPTER II 

WEAVING ON A HOME- 
MADE LOOM 

T is easier than sewing- or knitting 
or crocheting, and comes so natural 
to many of us that one would almost 
think we should know how to weave 
without being taught. Why, even 
some of the birds do a kind of weav- 
ing in their pretty, irregular fashion, 
and it was probably from the birds 
and other small, wild creatures that 
the earliest human mothers took their lessons in weaving, 
and learned to make the mats for their babies to sleep on 
and baskets for carrying their food. No one knows how 
long ago these first baskets and mats were woven, but in the 
beginning weaving was done without looms. Afterward 
rude frames were tied together and hung from the limbs 
of trees, then softer and more flexible material was used 
and finer fabrics were woven. To this day almost the 
same kind of looms are used by the Indians in our far 
Western country, many miles away from the roar and 
clatter of machinery, and on them are woven the wonder- 
fully beautiful Navajo blankets for which Eastern people 
are willing to pay such large sums. 

If it is natural to weave, it should also be natural to 
make one's own loom, and 

15 



i6 



Handicraft for Girls 



Q 



yw^rvyNryv^rv^rvyvY'vy*»^^'yv^r*^w^/vv~~~T 



The Pin Loom 

is simple in both the making and the working, with ma- 
terial usually close at hand. The necessary wood you will 
find at the nearest carpenter-shop, if not in your own home, 

and for the rest, a paper of strong, 
large-size pins, a yard of colored 
cord, and one ordinary carpet-tack 
are all that is needed. 

Make the frame for the loom of 
a smooth piece of soft pine-board, 
fifteen inches long by nine inches 
wide (Fig. 12). Make the heddles 
of two flat sticks, nine inches long, 
half an inch wide, and one-eighth 
of an inch thick (Figs. 13 and 14). 
From another flat stick of the same 
thickness, nine inches long by one 
inch wide, make the shuttle (Fig. 

15). 

With a pencil and ruler draw 

two straight lines aci'oss the board, 
the first one inch and a half from the top edge, the other 
two inches and a half from the bottom edge. This will 
make the lines just eleven inches apart. On these lines, 
beginning one inch from the side edge of the board, make a 

row of dots exactly one-quarter 

of an inch apart, twenty-nine 1 , . J 

dots on each line, as in Fig. 12. 

At each corner of the board, 

one inch above the upper line 

and one inch below the lower 

line, draw a short line, and on Fig. 14.— Heddie. 



; 55555557" 



Fig. 12- — The frame for the loom. 



Fig. 13.— Heddie. 



Weaving on a Home- Made Loom 17 

each short line, three-quarters of an inch from the side 
edge, make one dot. 

With a small tack-hammer drive a pin in each of the 
twenty-nine dots on each long- 
line, and in each single dot on / g= 
the four short lines (Fig. 12). 



FJg- 15.— The shuttle. 



When driving in the pins let 

them all slant evenly outward, 

the ones on the top lines slanting toward the upper edge 

of the board, those on the lower lines slanting toward 

the bottom edge, as in Fig. 16. 
XV. ■<#/ ■ Now lay 3'our board aside 

where nothing will be placed on 
Fig. 16. -Let the pins slant outward, top of it, and make your hcddlcs. 



The Heddles 

are for lifting the threads of the warp so that the shuttle 
may be passed through. One heddle is left perfectly plain, 
like Fig. 13. The other is cut in notches on one edge like 
Fig. 14. 

Along the entire length of one of the sticks rule a line 
dividing it exactly in the mid- 
dle (Fig. 17). On this line, be- 
ginning three-quarters of an 
inch from the end of the stick, 
mark off spaces one-quarter of 
an inch apart, making thirty- 
one dots. At the upper edge of the stick mark off the 
same number of spaces exactly opposite those on the line. 
Then draw straight lines connecting the upper and lower 
dots, extending the first and last lines entirely across the 
stick (Fig. 17.) At a point on the upper edge, exactly 



"A^) 



^TWT\j/T 



Fig. 17. — The marked-off notches in 
heddle. 



i8 



Handicraft for Girls 



in the middle between the first two lines, start a slanting 
line and bring it down to meet the second line where it 
touches the long line. Between the second and third 
lines draw another slanting line to meet the first at the 
bottom, forming a V. Leave the third line, and make 

another V at the 
fourth, and so go the 
length of the heddle, 
drawing a V at every 
other short line. At 
the top between the 
V's make smaller V's, 
as in Fig. 17. With 
a sharp knife cut out 
these notches, bring- 
ing the large ones 
quite down to the 
middle line (Fig. 17). 
On the end lines just 
below the middle line 
bore a hole with a 
small gimlet or a hat- 
pin heated red-hot at 
Letter A in Fig. 17. 
Indeed the notches, 
too, may be made 
wnth a hatpin by la}^- 
ing the red-hot end across the edge of the stick at the top 
of the line, and pressing it down while rubbing it back and 
forth. If you are unused to handling a knife, burning the 
notches will be the easier way. You can shape and trim 
them off afterward with the knife. 
Of the third flat stick make 




The complete pin loom. 



Weaving on a Home- Made Loom 19 



The Shuttle. 

Curve the corners at each end as in Fig. 15, Sharpen one 
end down to a thin edge and in the other end cut an eye 
two inches long and one-quarter of an inch wide (Fig. 15). 
Cut your yard of colored cord in half, pass the end of one 
piece through one of the holes in the notched heddle, the 
end of the other piece through the hole in the opposite end 
of the heddle, and tie each end of the cords to one of the 
pins at the four corners of the board, drawing the cords 
taut. This will fasten the heddle in its place across the 
loom (Fig. 12). 

Near the bottom of the board, directly below the last 
pin at the right on the long line, drive the carpet-tack to 
serve as a cleat for fastening the end of the warp. All that 
now remains to be done is 

To Adjust the Warp, 

and your loom will be ready for weaving. The threads 
which extend up and down, or from the top to the bottom 
of the loom, are called the warp. Soft, rather coarse knit- 
ting-cotton makes a good warp for 
almost anything woven on a small 
loom. 

Tie the end of the warp securely 
to the first pin on the long line at the 
upper left-hand corner of the loom 
(Fig. 18). Bring the string down and 
around the first two pins on the lower 
line, up again and around the second 
and third pins on the upper line, and 
then down and around the third and 
fourth pins on the lower line. Up Fig. is.-Adjusting the warp. 




20 



Handicraft for Girls 



again, down again, crossing two pins each time, back and 
forth until the last pin on the lower line has been reached. 
Wrap the warp around this pin several times, and then 
around the tack, tying it here so that it cannot slip. The 
warp must lie flat on the board \vhere it passes around the 
pins, and in stringing up it must be drawn rather tight, 
though not with sufficient force to pull the pins out of place. 
Turn the heddle on edge, the notches up, and slip the 
threads of the warp into the notches, one thread in each 
notch. This, you will see, divides the warp into upper and 

lower threads, and forms 
what is called the shed. 
While the threads are sepa- 
rated take the other heddle 
and darn it in and out above 
the first heddle, taking up 
the lower threads and bring- 
ing the heddle over the 
upper ones as in Fig. 19. 

The Woof 

is the thread which crosses 

the warp and usually covers 

it entirely. The material 

to use for wool will depend 

upon wdiat you are going 

to make. Germantown wool is used for the woof of the 

miniature Navajo blanket shown in the illustration. The 

warp is knitting-cotton. 

This is 

The Way to Weave a Navajo 

blanket; simpler things you can easily make after this first 
lesson: Of Germantown wool you will need three colors, 




Fig. 19. — Putting in the second heddle. 




A Miniature Navajo Blanket. 



22 



Handicraft for Girls 



which are the colors most frequently used by the Indians 
— red (scarlet), white, and black, about half a hank of each. 
Take five yards of white wool, fold one end over a two- 




Fig. 20.— The threaded shuttle. 

yard length, fold again, and push the double end through 

the eye of the shuttle (Fig. 20). 

Tie the long end of the wool to the first pin at the lower 

left-hand corner of the loom, on the long line, making a 

tight knot and pushing 
it down close to the 
board (Fig. 21). 

With the notched 
heddle on edge push 
the shuttle through 
the shed — that is, be- 
tween the upper and 
lower threads of the 
warp. Draw it out on 
the other side, then 
turn the heddle down, 
notched edge toward 
you, and stand the plain 

heddle on edge. This will lift the lower threads of the 

warp above the others and make them the upper ones. 

Push the shuttle back through the shed, lay the plain heddle 




Fig. ai.— Starting the woof. 



Pl^eaviiig on a Home-Made Loom 23 

flat, and stand up the notched heddle. Weaving from the 
left, the notched heddle always stands, while the plain one 
lies fiat. Weaving from the right, the plain heddle stands, 
and the notched one is turned down. 

Do not draw the woof tight across the warp. When you 
have passed the shuttle through, leave the thread like Fig. 
21, and then push it down firmly with your finger-tips until 
it lies close to the pins. 

A Coarse Comb 

with no fine teeth is very good to use for packing the woof, 
and takes the place of what is called the lay. While the 
woof is looped out like Fig. 21, comb it down toward you 
with the comb, and it will fit in evenly between the threads 
of the warp. As the woof of the Navajo blanket must be 
very tightly packed, use first the comb and then your fin- 
gers to push it down and make it compact. 

Weave back and forth until all the wool in the shuttle is 
used. If the end of the woof extends beyond the last thread 
of the warp on either side, turn it back and weave it under 
and over several threads, and start a new piece with the 
end just lapping the old. The ends of the woof must never 
be allowed to extend beyond the warp at the sides. It is 
not necessary to tie the new piece of woof ; the tight pack- 
ing will hold it in place. 

In this case the new woof must be of the red wool. 
Weave it across twice, or once over and back, making a 
very narrow red stripe, then cut it off and thread the shut- 
tle with white. Weave the white twice across, then change 
to black and weave a stripe one-quarter of an inch wide. 
Above the black weave another narrow white stripe and 
another narrow red one. Put a lonsf thread of white wool 



24 



Handicraft for Girls 



in the shuttle, and weave a white stripe one inch wide. You 
will have to thread the shuttle twice for this, as too long a 
thread will make so large a bunch that it will be difficult to 
pass it through the shed. After the white stripe weave 
another black, white, and red stripe like the first, then 
another inch-wide white stripe. Once more weave a black, 
a white, and a red stripe. Begin with the narrow black, 
follow with the narrow white, and then weave a wider red 
stripe, taking the thread four times across. After the red 
the narrow^ white, and then the narrow black stripe. 
This last stripe is the lower border of 

The Central Pattern 



of the blanket, where your weaving will become more 
difficult, and at the same time more interesting. 

Thread the shuttle with a long piece of red wool and 
weave it once across from the left, turn back and weave 

through five threads of the 
warp, draw the shuttle out 
and weave back again to the 
edge; again weave through 
the five threads, then back 
as shown at B in Fig. 22. 
Turn here and do not take 
up the last thread of the 
warp; pass the shuttle un- 
der three threads, turn on 
the next thread, and bring 
it back under four threads 
(C, Fig. 22), once more under the three threads, turning on 
the next as before, but passing back under two threads 
only. Turn on the next thread (D), and pass under three. 




Figs. 32 and 23. — ^\Veaving the centre stripe. 



JVeaving on a Home-Made Loo7n 25 

Back under two threads (E), turn as before on the next 
thread under two, turn, back under two (F), turn, under 
one, turn on the next, under two (G), turn, under one, 
turn on the next, back under two, and unthread the shuttle, 
leaving the woof hanging. 

Begin with "a new piece of red wool, follow the same 
direction, and weave another red point on the next five 
threads, then a third one which will take in the last warp- 
thread on the left. You will notice in the diagram that the 
woof always turns twice on the same thread of warp. 

When the three red points are finished fill in the spaces 
between with black (Fig. 23), then continue to weave the 
black up into points as you did the red, making two whole 
and two half black diamonds. Leave the woof quite loose 
when you make a turn in weaving, and the space left be- 
tween the red and black will fill up in packing. 

Take up the end of the red wool left at the top of the 
first red point, and weave in the space between the half and 
first black diamond, then break off. Take the next red end 
and fill in between the two whole diamonds, then the next, 
and fill in between the whole and the last half diampnd. 
This will give you a pattern of black diamonds on a red 
ground. Weave the last of the red woof once across, then 
break off and weave a black, white, and red stripe like the 
one forming the lower border of the pattern. Finish the 
blanket with the wide white stripes and narrow colored 
ones like those first woven. 

To take the work from the loom, cut the threads be- 
tween the pins at the top of the loom, and with quick but 
gentle jerks pull it off the lower row of pins. Tie together 
the first and third loose ends of the warp close to the edge 
of the blanket, then the second and fourth threads, and so 
on across, then cut the ends off rather close to the knots. 



26 Handicraft for Girls 

The little Navajo blanket woven in this way will closely 
resemble the real Indian blanket in texture, pattern, and 
colors. 

Blankets for Dolls' Beds 

may also be woven of fine white wool and finished with a 
pretty pink or blue border at each end. A wash-cloth, soft 
and pleasant to the touch, you can weave in half an hour 
with candle-wick for woof. This should not be packed 
tightl}', but woven with rather a loose mesh. Then there 
are cunning little rag rugs to be made for the dolls' house, 
with colored rags for the woof. But so many materials may 
be woven on your home-made loom, that it will be a pleas- 
ure for you to discover them for yourself. 



CHAPTER III 

A BALL OF TWINE AND 
WHAT MAY BE MADE OF IT 

UN to the kitchen and ask the 
cook to lend you her pastry- 
board for a day or two, to use 
as a support for holding string 
from which to make a toy ham- 
mock (Fig. 24). 

Drive twelve large tacks in a 

straight line across the top edge 

of the board; place the tacks 

one inch and a half apart (Fig. 

25), and with a pencil draw lightly a line across the board 

from side to side, one inch and a half below the tacks. 





Fig. 24.— The hammock you can make. 

27 



28 



Handicraft for Girls 



This will guide you in keeping the knots even. Be sure 
that the line is perfectly straight; then draw another 

line one inch and a half 
below the first and con- 
tinue making lines until 
the board is covered with 
them, at equal distances 
apart and running across 
from side to side. Over 
each tack on the top of the board hang a piece of string 
about two yards long (Fig. 26). Being doubled, each 
string makes two lengths of 



Fig- 25 —Tacks in top of board. 



Fig. 26.— Over each tack hang a piece of 
string. 



one yard each. 

Bring the two ends of 

each strand down evenly 

together that all the strings 

may hang exactly the same 

in length. Fig. 26 is in- 
tended only to show how 

to hang the strings and 

gives but a section of the 

work. 

With strong pins fasten the first and fourth strings 

down tight to 
the board (see 
B and E, Fig. 
27); then tie 
the second and 
third strings to- 
gether (C, D, 
Fig. 27), mak- 
ing the knot H 

Fig 27. — AA/ith strong pins fasten the first and fourth strings „\ . 

to the board. (^ !&• "^7)' 



r 




A Ball of Twine 



29 




Fig. 28. — When knot H is secure stick pin in string G. 



To Tie the Knot, 

bring- the two strings C and D (Fig. 27) together; hold the 

upper portions with the thumb and first finger of the left 

hand and the 

lower parts in 

the right hand, 

bring the lower 

parts up above 

the left hand — 

across and over 

the portion of 

string held in 

the left hand — 

and turn them 

down a trifle, 

running them under the strings in the left hand just above 

the thumb and first finger; pull the lower portion of the 

strings through the loop 
out over the first finger 
of the left hand as shown 
in Fig. 29, O. Tighten the 
knot with the right hand 
while holding it in place 
on the line with the left. 
The secret of tying the 
knot properly is to hold 
the two strings together 
and tie them exactly as 
one would tie a knot in 
a single string. 
When the first knot (H, Fig. 27) is tied, take the pin out 

of the string E and stick it in the string G, according to 




Fig. 29.— Tying the knot. 



30 Handicraft for Girls ^^^^ 

Fig. 28. Fasten down the knot H with another pin, and 
you will have the knot H and the string G firm and tight 
to the board while you tie the two loose strings F and 
E together, forming the knot K. Pin this down to the 
board and remove the pin from the string G and place 
it in the string N, leaving M and G free to be knotted 
together. 

Continue tying the strings in this way until you have 
made the first row of knots across the board, always using 
pins to hold the boundary-strings securely to the board on 
each side of the two you are tying. As each knot is formed, 
pin it to the board and allow the pins to remain in the first 
row until the second row of knots has been made. 

Fig. 29 shows the beginning of the third row of knots in 
the knot P, the pin being taken from the first knot, H, 
ready to be placed in the knot P. Form row after row of 
meshes by knotting the strings until the netting comes too 
near the bottom of the board to work comfortably, then 
slip the top loops off from the tacks and hang a portion of 
the net over the top of the board, allowing a lower row of 
meshes to hang on the tacks. 

Fasten the last row of the knots carefully, binding 
with strong strings the short loose ends of the strands 
securely to the string forming the mesh each side of the 
knot. Remove the net from the board and make 

A Fringe 

of string on each side of the hammock. In Fig. 30, T shows 
how to place a strand for the fringe under one side of the 
mesh on the edge of the net; and S gives the manner of 
bringing the ends of the strand down over the string form- 
ing the mesh and under the loop made by the centre of the 
fringe-strand. Pull the two ends of the strand down 



A Ball of Twine 



31 



evenly, and bring the knot up close and tight to the ham- 
mock-mesh as shown in the finished fringe in Fig 30. 

When you have 
made the fringe, 
thread a separate 
heavy cord through 
the loops on each 
side of the ham- 
mock (Fig. 31). 
Tie the loops to- 
gether (Fig. 32) 
and fasten together 
the two ends of 




Fig. 30. — Making the fringe. 



each cord, making these two extra last loops long enough 
to allow of a free swing for the little hammock, or you can 
thread a cord of the same as that used in the hammock 
through every loop, tying the ends of each piece together 
through a brass ring, and instead of one long loop a number 
will support the hammock. 

Fig. 33 shows a strong, ser- 
viceable little 

School-Bag 

which is easier to make than 
the hammock. Take a piece of 
heavy cord twenty inches long, 
lap one end to the distance of 
an inch over the other and sew 
the two lapped ends firmly to- 
gether; then bind them neatly 
around and around with string. 
^^^'J^'^T^^ Bring the two edges or sides „. ^^ „. 

cord through loops » ° , Fig. 32.— lie 

on end of hammock, of thc circlc together, forming loops together. 





32 



Handicraft for Girls 



two ends (V V, Fig. 34). Tie a strong string on each end 
(Fig. 34) and fasten each of the strings to the back of 
a chair; you will tiien have a circle of heavy cord 
securely suspended in mid-air. Cut twenty-four lengths 







F'g- 33- — Your school-bag made of string. 

of twine, each twenty-five inches long ; double each piece 
and fasten all the strands on the circle of heavy cord 
in the same way 3-ou made the fringe on the hammock 
(X X, Fig, 34), except that this time the strands must be 
quite a distance apart. Let all the spaces between the 
strands be equal. Having fastened the lengths of twine on 




Making a sash-curtain for her room. 



33 



34 



Handicraft for Girls 



the circle, net them together exactly as you netted the 
hammock, but you must depend upon your eye to keep the 
meshes even and of the same size, as there will be no board 
with lines to guide you (Fig. 34). Tie the knots in circular 
rows, going around on both sides of the circle for each row. 
Continue the meshes until within three and a half inches 
of the bottom, then tie the two sides together, closing the 
bottom of the bag and forming the fringe shown in Fig. 33. 

Having finished the bag, untie the strings attached to 
the two ends and make 
two handles of heavy 
cord or slender rope. 
Fasten the handles on 
their respective sides of 
the bag. Loop the ends 
of the handles under the 
cord forming the top of 
the bag, and bring each 
end up against its own side of the handle. Sew each of 
the two ends of the two handles securely to the handle 
proper; then bind the sewed portions neatly together with 
fine cord as in Fig. 33. 

With some firm straws and more string we will make 

A Sash-Curtain 




F'S- 34- — Making the school-bag. 



for the window of your own room, as the little girl is doing 
in the illustration. Loop about thirty strands on the same 
number of tacks, in the manner in which you hung those 
for the hammock (Fig. 26). Make one row of knots, and 
before forming the next row slide a piece of straw one inch 
long over the two strings wnich are to be knotted to- 
gether; the ends of the string must be moistened and 



A Ball of Twine 



35 



brought together in a point in order that thej may more 
easily be threaded through the straw. The letter R in 
Fig. 35 shows the straw with the ends of the string run 
through it, and U gives a straw higher up on the strings. 
After each straw is put into place, knot the strings imme- 
diately underneath to pre- 
vent the straw from sliding 
out of position. 

Fig- 35 shows how to 
manage the work. It is 
almost exactly like that of 
the hammock, the only dif- 
ference being the threading 
on of the straws which hold 
the strings in place without 
a knot at the top (see W in 
Fig. 35). Let the bottom 
of the net end in a fringe. 
Take the loops off from 
the tacks when the curtain 
is finished, and slide them 
on a straight, slender stick, 
which you can fasten to the window by resting the ends 
of the stick through loops of tape tacked on the sides 
of the window-frame at the right distance up from the 
ledge of the window. 

If possible, let all the net-work be made of pliable, soft 
material; it is easier to handle, and the results are much 
prettier. 

Make the curtains of any color you may fancy. 




F'S- 35- — Sliding straws on strings for 
curtain. 



CHAPTER IV 




AN ARMFUL OF 

SHAVINGS AND WHAT 

TO DO WITH THEM 

O you love to g"0 into a carpen- 
ter-shop, with its sweet-smelling 
woods and fascinating tangle 
of white and rose-tinted shav- 
ings, and to watch the carpenter 
guide his plane along the edge of a board, shaving off so 
evenly and smoothly the long curls which look almost as 
natural as the ringlets of a little girl ? I am sure that many 
times you have tucked the ends of the shavings under your 
hat and scampered off with the curls streaming out behind 
or bobbing up and down delightfully at the sides. 

It is great fun, yet there is still more entertainment to 
be found in these pretty shavings. 

Gather an armful, then, choosing the most perfect ones, 
not too thin, with firm, smooth edges, and you shall weave 
them into 

A Pretty, Soft Little Basket 

like the illustration. 

Pine-shavings are the best to use, as they are less brittle 
than those of harder woods. Select a number and put them 
to soak in cold water to make them soft and pliable. Then, 
lifting out those of an even width, place them before you 

36 



^11 Annfitl of Shavings 



37 



on a lap-board or table, and after passing them between your 
fingers several times to take the curl out, cut eight pieces 




The soft little basket made of shavings. 



CI 



Fig. 36.— 

Directly 

across the 

centre draw 

a straight 

line. 



eleven inches long. Directly across the centre of two of 
the strips draw a straight line, as in Fig, 36. Place one of 
these strips, A, fiat on the table and lay the other, B, across 
it so that the up- 
per edge of B will 
touch the divid- 
ing line of A and 
the mark on B 
will be on a line 
with right-hand 
edge of A, Fig. 37. 
Under A slide 
another strip, C, 
Fig. 38. Over B 
and under C slide 



Fig- 37-— So that the upper edge of B 
will touch the dividing line of A. 



38 



Handicraft for Girls 



the strip D, Fig. 39. Over D and under A pass the strip 
E, Fig. 40. Under E, over B and under C weave the strip 



IaW 



Fig. 38. — Under A slide the strip C. 




Fig. 39. — Over B and under C slip 
the strip D. 



F, Fig. 41. Under E, over B, and under C weave the strip 

G, Fig. 42. Over F, under D, over A, and under G weave 




Fig. 40. — Over D and under A pass E. 




c 



c 



c^ 



m 



Fig. 41. — ^Under E, over B and under 
C weave F. 



the strip H, Fig. 43. This forms a square for the bottom 
of the basket. 

Bend up the ends and 



An Armful of Shavings 



39 



Weave the Sides 

with longer, narrower shavings which you can make by cut- 
ting lengthwise through the middle of several wide shavings. 



Tfl 





Fig. 42. — Under E, over B and 
under C weave G. 



Fig. 43. — This forms the bottom of 
the basket. 



If you find any difficulty in keeping in place the part 
you have woven, pin it to the board or table with several 
pins, as in Fig. 44. Bring the sides up close to the edges 
of the bottom, then start your 
weaver at D, on the inside of 
the basket (Fig. 44). 

Weave all the way around, 
turning the corners sharply, 
until the weaver meets the first 
end ; lap it over this, cut it off 
and tuck the last end under H. 
Start the next weaver at C, 
weave it around and tuck 
under E. Weave five weav- 
ers around the sides of the 

basket, beginning each time Fig. 44.— Bend up the ends now and weave 

the sides. 




40 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 45. — Bend the upright shavings over 
the top edge. 



in a new place that the joints may not all come together, 
then bend the upright shavings over the edge of the top 
weaver, tucking the ends of each under the third weaver, 

one inside, the next outside, as 
they may come inside or out- 
side the basket (Fig. 45). 

Bind the Edge 

with two binders the width of 
the side weavers. Hold one 
inside, one outside, and whip 
them on over and over, taking 
the stitches with a narrow strip 
of shaving as shown in Fig. 
46. 
Cut two strips the width of your side weavers for 

The Handle, 

making one twelve inches and the other eleven inches long. 
One inch from each end cut notches, as in Fig. 47. Slide 
the end of the short strip under the second weaver on 
one side of the basket and pull it up until the 
points catch on the weaver, then tuck the end un- 
der the lower weaver (see illustrations). 

Loop the handle diagonally over the basket and 

fasten the other end 
on the second weaver 
on the side. Secure 
the ends of the long- 
strip on the third 
weaver, allowing it to 
cross the other side 
of the handle at the 



n 




Fig. 46.— Bind the edge with two 
binders. 



Fig. 

47-— 
Notch 
the 
ends 
Uke 
this. 



tj 



An Armful of Shavings 



41 




top, then bind the two pieces together at the middle by 
wrapping with a shaving of the same width ovei^ and over. 
Split this wrapper at the 
last end and tuck the two 
ends in at the sides. Fig. 
48 shows the under part of 
the handle with one end of 
the wrapper tucked in. 

You can make table- 
mats, charming little hand- 
kerchief-cases, and a num- 
ber of other things of the 

dainty shavings, all on the same principle as that of the 
basket. 

To make 

The Handkerchief-Case, 

weave a square, measuring eight inches, of the narrow shav- 
ings, just as you did for the bottom of the basket. These 
shavings must be twelve inches long and you will probably 



Fig. 48. — Tuck the two ends in at the 
sides. 




The handkerchief case. 



need about thirty-two pieces. When the square is finished 
tuck in the ends, as around the edge of the basket, then 
bend in three of the corners to meet at the middle and 



42 Handicraft for Girls 



catch with needle and thread. Sew a quarter of a yard of 
bright ribbon where the corners join and another quarter 
of a yard on the loose corner. (See illustration.) Put your 
handkerchiefs in the little pocket, bring up the loose point, 
and tie the ribbon in a pretty bow. 



CHAPTER V 
PRIMITIVE REED CURTAINS 

HESE pretty rustic hangings can 
be made very easily and quick- 
ly. They are light in weight 
and the general tone of color- 
ing, when the reeds have been 
carefully dried at home, is a 
pleasing soft gray green, with 
suggestions here and there of 
gray browns, reds, and yellows. 
The curtains may be either of 
these reeds or fresh green cat- 
tails, and even of the silvered 
gray stalks left standing from 
last season. The cost in actual outlay of money for several 
curtains need be only a few cents for cord, staple-tacks 
or nails, and screw-eyes, but, like the early savage whose 
method of work you are imitating, you must collect the 

Raw Material 

out in the open. So away to the spot where the finest cat- 
tails grow, gather a lot of them, cutting the stalks off clean 
and smooth at the base, that the cat-tails may not be bent or 
split, for as reeds in your curtain they must be as nearper- 
fect as possible. Cut the velvety brown head off from each 
one, making all of the stalks the same in length ; then, with 

43 




44 



Handicraft for Girls 



several long leaves twisted together for string, tie the 
stalks into a bundle and march home with the treasure. 
An old bamboo fishing-rod, a length of handle from a 

long- handled 



d 




B 



JQL. 



J 



Fig. 49.— Beginning a primitive curtain. 



dusting or win- 
dow brush, or 
any kind of a 
long, slender, 
smooth, round 
stick will do 
for the top cur- 
tain-pole from 
which to hang 

the reeds. Lay the pole across a table in front of and 

parallel to you ; then tie the centres of four pieces of cord 

of even lengths on it at equal distances from each other 

(Fig. 49). Detail of the work is given in Fig. 50. Place 

a cat-tail reed up against the four ties, allowing one string 

from each tie 

to come over 

and the other 

underthe cat-tail 

(Fig. 51). Cross 

the two lengths 

ofeach cord over 

the last cat-tail, 

bringing the 

lower string up 

and the upper 

string down (Fig. 

52) ; then lay another reed up against the crossed strings, 

carrying the strings in turn over this reed (Fig. 53). Again 

bring the lower strings up and the upper down before 




Fig. 50. — Centre of twine tied 
on long stick. 



Prhnitive Reed Curtains 



45 



placing in 
another cat- 
tail, and always 
alternate the 
large and small 
ends of the 
reeds as in 
Fig. 54, in or- 
der to have 
them equally 
balanced and 
to avoid bring- 
ing all the 
small ends on 
one side and 
the large ones 
on the other 
side of the cur- 
tain. 

Continue 

Crossing the 

Cord 

and adding cat- 
tails until the 
curtain is of 
the desired 
length. Tie 
the ends of the 
string on each 
line securely 
together and 
tuck them un- 




Fig. 51. — Allow one string to come over and the other under 
the cat-tail. 




Fig. 52. — Cross the two lengths of twine. 




Fig- 53- — Lay another cat-tail up against the crossed strings. 



dz: 



Fig- 54- — Alternate large and small ends of reeds. 



46 



Handicraft for Girls 



der the weave, hiding the ends on the wrong side of the 
curtain (Fig. 55). At equal short distances from the tips 
of the head-pole fasten in a screw-eye large enough to 
pass readily over the two hooks immediately above the 
window where the curtain is to hang (Fig. 55, A, A). 




Fig- 55- — Primitive curtain of reeds and twine stitch. 

On the centre of the space along the upper side of the 
top pole, between the first and second cord and the third 
and fourth cord, drive in a staple-nail (Fig. 49, B, B), shown 
more plainly in Fig. 56. These staple-nails are for hold- 
ing in place the long cord used in rolling up the cur- 
tain (Fig. 57, B, B, and Fig. 58, B, B). Thread one end of a 



Prmiitive Reed Curtains 



47 



long piece of cord from the back of the curtain through 
one staple-nail and the other end through the other staple- 
nail. Bring both ends of 
the cord down over the 
front of the curtain around 
the bottom and up over the 
back; then tie the ends on 



^ 



\ \ 



Fig. 56.— Staple nail in top pole of curtain. 



the pole (Fig. 57, C, C). Dotted lines show how the cord 
runs along the back of the curtain. Have the cord suf- 
ficiently long to allow of the stretch between the two 
staple-nails B and B (Figs. 57 and 58), to hang down over the 



B C 




Fig. 57. — Cord fastened on top pole for rolling up curtain. 



48 



Handicraft for Girls 



back and extend in a loop below the bottom edge of the 
curtain (Fig. 57, D). When you wish to raise the curtain, 
pull the bottom loop and up will go the curtain (Fig. 58). 
These primitive hangings are just the thing for outing 
cottages on the sea-shore or log-houses in the mountains. 

B B 




Fig. 58.— Cat-tail cur- 
tain raised by loop 
from bottom. 



You can have fun weaving them while at your summer 
home and in place of the old-fashioned quilting-bee you 
might give a 

Curtain-Bee Frolic. 

The girls and bo3's could readily make a number of hang- 



Primitive Reed Curtains 49 

ings in one afternoon, and while weaving the reeds together 
they would weave into the work all sorts of bright speeches 
and gay laughter, so that ever after the curtains would be 
filled with delightful associations of the charming summer 
afternoon. Reed curtains can be fashioned in any width. 
If very narrow hangings are in demand, cut your reeds to 
measure the length needed for the curtain-width and weave 
them together with the same twine cross-weave used in 
Fig- 55- 

Doorway-Screens 

hung on a swinging, armlike rod extending, when open, at 
right angles with the doorway, and easily moved forward 




Fig- 59— Small end of one cat-tail. Fig. 60.— Large end of another. 

or backward, are attractive when of woven reeds, especially 
if dull, green-colored cord is used in the manufacture in 
place of ordinary twine. For very wide out-of-door ve- 
randa-shades, select the strongest cat-tails and dig out about 
two inches of pith from the large end of one cat-tail very 
cautiously to avoid breaking the sides ; then push the small 



Fig. 61.— Wide curtain, each reed of two cat-tails joined. 

end of another cat-tail into the opening (Figs. 59, 60, 61) ; 
weave these long pieces together as you wove the single 
reeds in the first curtain, using extra lines of weave. If 
you cannot obtain cat-tails, take other reeds ; or cut some 



50 Handicraft for Girls 

straight, slender poles from shrubs or trees, and weave 
them into curtains with colored cord of reds or browns. 
Such pole-hangings would be excellent for the open front of 
your mountain shack or lean-to, and they could do service 
in screening the sunlight, when too strong, from the central 
open way of your saddle-bag log-house. 



4 




Sitting in the orchard 



52 



CHAPTER VI 




THINGS TO MAKE 

OF COMMON GRASSES 

A Grasshopper-House 

A M M Y, make me a grasshopper- 
house." 

" Go 'long, chile, I done got 'nough 
to do 'thout makin' no hoppergrass- 
houses." 

" Please, mammy, only one, and 
I can make them for myself. I'll 
watch you just as close. Won't you, 
mammy ? " 

" Pick me some grasses, then ; I 'low I has to, but don't 
yo' come pesterin' me no more after this time. 

" Seed-top grasses, honey, seed-top grasses ; don't git me 
none of them blade kind. Ketch hoi' near the top and pull 
'em up slow like, then they'll come out nice and smooth, an' 
leave they ole rough skins behind, just like a eel does when 
you skins him. That's it, you got 'nough now ; bring- 'em 
'long here an' we'll make the hoppergrass-house. 

" Hoi' your own hand, honey, you'll learn best that-a- 
way. Can't forgit the feelin' of it once you build it on yo' 
fingers. 

"Take one piece o' grass an' put it round yo' middle 
finger with the ends inside like this (Fig. 62). Now lay the 
next piece right across the first (Fig. 63), an' bend back the 

53 



54 



Handicrafi for Girls 





Fig. 6j. — Put the grass around 
your middle finger with the 
end inside. 



Fig. 63.— Lay the next grass across the first. 



^^ 





Fig. 64.— Bend back the ends 
of the first grass. 



Fig. 65.— Put the next grass 
across your hand. 



Things to Make of Cofmnon Grasses 55 




Fig. 66. — Bend back the second grass 
ends like the first. 

the under ends 
back ev'ry time. How 
many bars has yo' got 
now? Six? That's 'nough 
fo' any hoppergrass, an' 
is as many as yo' little 
hand can hoi' anyway. 

" Now slip it offen yo' 
fingers, bring the ends 
together an' tie with a 
blade o' grass just above 
these here blossom ends 
(see illustration). There 
now, yo' done made a 
hoppergrass - house, an' 
don' yo' come askin' yo' 
■^- « -r- ^t. * *t. ole mammy to stop her 

Fig. 67.— Tie them together J ^ 

at the root ends. WOrknomorC." 



ends of the first grass 
over the tother an' tuck 
'em 'tween yo' fingers just 
like that (Fig. 64). Put 
the next grass across yo' 
hand (Fig. 65), an' take up 
the second grass-ends, 
bendin' 'em back to keep 
company with first grass- 
ends. That makes an- 
other bar (Fig. 66). Now 
yo' do it an' let mammy 
see how yo' git along 
That's right, lay the grass 
across an' put 




Fig. 68.— Lift two of 
the grasses and tie 
them together. 



56 



Handicraft for Girls 



That is the way the little girls and boys in the South 
are taught to make the grasshopper-houses, by the old 
colored "mammies." They are funny little cages, and, of 
course, will not hold a grasshopper or any 
other insect, but we like to imagine they will. 
There are other things to make of grasses, 
any one of them requiring only a few mo- 
ments' work, and it is a pretty, quiet occupa- 
tion f(^r restless little fingers. Sitting in the 
orchard, nestling like little partridges amid 
the tall grasses, all your ma- 
terials are close at hand. Reach 
out and gather some of the long- 
bladed grass, and we will make 



II 



A Doll's Hammock 

Some of this grass measures 
twenty-five inches in length. 
It does not grow on stalks, but 
the blade appears to spring 
directl}' from the root, and it 
is smooth and pliable. You 
may find orchard-grass almost 
anywhere, generall}^ in neglect- 
ed corners and close to fences 
where the scythe does not 
reach. 

Take eight or ten of the 
Fig. 69.-Tie them all bladcs of this grass and tie 

in pairs. ^ 

them together at the root-ends 
as in Fig. 6^, drawing the knot tight as in Fig. 68. Stick 
a pin through just below the knot and fasten to vour knee; 
then lift two of the grasses at the right-hand side, and tie 



The 
grasshopper-house. 



Tliuigs to Make of Common Grasses 57 



them together about one inch below the pin (Fig. 68). Tie 
the next two grasses together in the same manner, the next, 
and the next, until you have tied them all in pairs (Fig. 69). 
Make the second row by separating the pairs of the first 

and tying one grass of 

one pair to the neigh- 
boring grass of the next 

pair, making the knots 

one inch below the first 

row. This leaves the 

first and last grasses 

hanging loose (Fig. 70). 

On the third row the 

first and last grasses are 

tied in once more (Fig. 

70). On the fourth they 

are left again, and so 

they alternate until the 
Fig. 70.— Make the knots hammock is finished. 

of the second row one 

inch below the first row. Keep the rows of knots 
at even distances apart, 
and make the hammock as long as the 
length of the grass will allow. Leave 
about three inches of the grass below the 
last row of knots, and then tie the ends 
together as in the illustration. Swing 
the little hammock between the low-hang- 
ing branches of a tree ; put your dolly 
in it and let the summer breezes rock 
her to sleep while you sing: 





The grass hammock. 



Rock-a-by baby in the tree-top. 



A ver}' pretty 



58 



Handicraft for Girls 



Bouquet-Holder 

can be made of seed-grasses and one long- blade of grass. 
In this you may carry the most delicate wild flowers and 

ferns without wilting them 

b}' the warmth of your 

hand. 

Bunch together seven 

fine, strong seed-grass 

stalks and tie just below 

the blossoms, with the 

root-end of your long- 
blade grass (Fig. 71). The 

stems of the seed-grasses 

are the spokes, the long 

grass the weaver. Turn 

the blossom-ends down, 

the stem-ends up, and close 

to where it is tied, begin 

to weave the long grass in 

and out, under one spoke, 

over the next, under the 

third, over the fourth, go- 
ing around and around 

spirally until the end of 

the weaver is reached, 

then tie it to one of the 

spokes. Keep forcing the 
Bouquet-holder made gpokes farther and farther 

of seed-grass. ^ 

apart as you weave until 
the holder is shaped like a cone. As you see in the illustra- 
tion, the weaver never passes over one of the spokes twice 
in succession. In one row it goes over a spoke, in the next 




Fig. 71. — Bunch together 
the seed-grass stalks. 



Things to Make of Common Grasses 59 



row under it, in the third over again, and so on. In order 
that it may always come this way you must have an uneven 
number of spokes. Four will not 
do, nor six, nor eight, but five, seven, 
or nine spokes will bring the weave 
out all right. 




A Grass Napkin-Ring 

is another thing that can be made 
by weaving or braiding the grasses. 
Select ten fine long blades of 
grass, divide them into two bunches 
of five each, put the root-ends to- 
gether, and tie them as when making the hammock. Pin 
these two bunches to your knee about two inches apart, 
and taking one blade from each bunch, cross them as in 



Grass napkin-ring. 




c -^ V 

Fig. 72. — Xake one blade from each 
bunch and cross them. 




Fig. 73. — Bring C over A and D un- 
der B and over C. 



6o 



Handicraft for Girls 



Fig-. 72, the right-hand grass A on top of the left-hand 
grass B. Now bring the left-hand grass C over A, and the 
right-hand grass D under B and over C (Fig. 73). Next 
weave the left-hand grass E under A and over D, then 
the right-hand grass F over B, under C, and over E. 
Weave the remaining four grasses in the same way, taking 
first from one side, then from the other. When your work 
has reached the stage shown in Fig. 74, take the grass A, 





Fig. 74. — Weave the remaining grasses in 
the same way. 



S A 

Fig. 76. — Turn the grass A under, 
and weave it in and out. 



turn it under and weave it in and out as in Fig. j^, then the 
grass B, turn it over and weave until it crosses A (Fig. 76). 
D comes next, to be woven until it crosses B, then C, 
which will cross D. On the left hand always turn the 
grasses under before beginning to weave, on the right hand 
turn them over before beginning to weave. 



Things to Make of Common Grasses 6i 



When You Have Woven 

or braided a strip about five inches 
long, untie the two knots at the top, 
form the braid into a ring and tie the 
opposite ends together in two knots. 
The groups G and G in Fig. JJ form 
one knot, the groups H and H the 
other knot. Trim the ends off neatly 
and the napkin-ring will look like the 
one in the illustration. 

Do not use rough or saw-edged 
grasses for any of this work, for they 
sometimes cut the hands, and the 
seed-top grasses must not be old 
enough to shed their seeds into your 
eyes. When dry most grass is quite 
brittle and will break if you attempt 
to bend it. The fresh, green, soft 
and pliable grasses are the kind you 
need and these you may always find 
in season. 




Fig- 77. 



-Tie the opposite ends 
together. 




CHAPTER VII 
THE POSSIBILITIES OF A CLOTHES-LINE 

^OU can form it into graceful patterns 
of curves and coils, loops and rings ; 
)u can weave it basket-fashion or net it 
together with brass curtain-rings, and you 
can fray it out into soft, pretty tassels. 
You can make it into a decorative wood- 
basket, a grille for an open doorway, fringe 
for curtains and portieres, or decoration for 
the top of a wooden chest. One use will 
suggest another and you will probably find 
some way of adapting the rope that has never yet been 
thought of. 

Hemp rope and cotton, large rope and small, down to 

the ordinary heavy twine, all lend themselves to this work. 

It requires a rather heavy clothes-line, one considerably 

lighter, called by some rope-cord, and a piece of strong 

twine for the 

Wood-Basket 
shown in the illustration. 

Make the bottom of a board two feet long and sixteen 
inches wide, and on each end of the board nail securely 
one-half of a barrel-hoop (Fig. 78). From an old broom- 
stick cut four rounds one inch thick for the feet (Fig. 
79), and fasten one round to each corner underneath the 
board with strong screws or wire nails (Fig. 78, Z Z). 

62 



The Possibilities of a Clothes-Line 63 




The wood-basket. 

This is all the wood you will need for the basket, the 
rest is to be made entirely of rope. 

Take your small rope and nail one end of it to the 
edge of the bottom, close 
to one end of one of the 
barrel-hoops (Fig. 80), then 
wrap the hoop with the 
rope, one row close to 
another until it is com- 
pletely covered. Cut off z. 

the rODe when it reaches Fig- 78-— On each end nail one-half of a barrel- 

the end of the hoop and 

nail it down as you did the first end of the rope in be- 
ginning. Fasten a piece of the heavy rope entirely around 
the edge of the board, nailing it at intervals along each side, 

but leaving loose that at the end edges until 

later. Make the 

End Pieces 

Fi -For °^ ^^^ basket by looping and twisting the heavy 
the feet. rope into the pattern shown in Fig. 8i, form- 




64 



Handicraft for Girls 




ing as many loops as are required to reach across the 
end of the bottom. Wrap and tie one row of the loops 
to the rope on the end edge of the board and the side 
loops to the hoops, using 
the twine for this purpose. 
Eight inches from the 
end of the bottom, under- 
neath but near the side edge, 
nail one end of your heavy 
rope ; bring it up slantingly 
and wrap and tie it to the 
hoop just above and touch- 
ing the top edge of the 
loops, stretch the rope 
tightly across the hoop and 
tie at the other side, then 
carry the end down and 
fasten underneath the bot- 
tom eight inches from the end of the board (see illustra- 
tion). Wrap and tie the top loops of the end piece to the 
top rope as shown in illustration. Finish the other end of 
the basket in the same manner, not forgetting to nail in 

place the rope left 
loose at the end 
edges. Give the 
completed wood- 
basket several coats 
of dark varnish. 
The varnish not 
only produces a 
nice finish, smooth- 
ing down both wood and rope, but also stiffens and helps 
to hold the rope in place. 



Fig. 80. — Nail one end of the small rope to 
the edge of the bottom. 




Fig. 81. — Make the end pieces like this. 



The Possibilities of a Clothes-Line 65 



A Rope Netting 
at once simple and effective is made like Fig. 82. 

This netting may be made of heavy rope for a grille in 
an open doorway, or of lighter rope for fringe. In either 
case the method is the same. 

In a board, at regular distances apart, along a straight 




Fig. 82. — A Rope netting. 



line, drive a row of wire nails. It depends upon the size of 
the rope how far apart the nails should be placed. For a 
heavy rope there must be at least four inches between, and 
this distance should lessen as the rope decreases in size. 

Cut your rope into pieces four feet in length if it is 
heavy, not so long if it is light rope. Loop one piece of 
rope over each nail and let it hang down evenly, then 



66 



Handicraft for Girls 



bring the first and fourth strands together and slip on them 
a small brass curtain or embroidery ring (Letter A, Fig. 83). 
Push the ring up to within four inches of the line of nails if 
the nails are four inches apart. If the distance between the 

nails is three inches 
the ring must be 
three inches below 
the line. Catch the 
ring to each strand 
of rope with needle 
and thread to hold 
it in place. Bring 
the third and sixth 
strands together 
and slip on a ring 
(Letter B, Fig. 83). 
Then the fifth and 
seventh, and so 
across the board. 
Begin the next row by slipping a ring on the first and 
second strands, placing it the same distance below the first 
row of rings that the first row of rings is below the line of 
nails (Letter C, Fig. 83). Bring the third and fourth strands 
together with a ring, the fifth and sixth, continuing the 
original pairing of the strands until the row is complete. 
The third row of rings brings together again the second 
and fourth strands, the third and sixth, as in the first row, 
and the fourth row of rings goes back to pairing the first 
and second, third and fourth strands. 




Fig. 83. — Slip on a small brass curtain ring. 



The Tassels 

Below the last row of rings wrap and tie the strands 
together, then untwist the ends of the rope up to where it 



k 



The Possibilities of a Clothes-Line 67 

is tied and fray it out until it becomes fluffy. Make the 
head of the tassel by wrapping closely with twine a short 
distance below the ring, or you may slip on several of the 
brass rings as a finish. 

The board on which you make your netting need not be 
any longer than is convenient to handle, for when one part 
of the netting is finished it can be taken off the nails and 
new strands added to carry on the work. 

Fig. 84 is an ornamental design suitable for decorating 
a wooden chest or, if sewed on cloth, for a hanging. By 
studying the design you can easily 
reproduce it without the aid of de- 
scription or other 
diagram. 




Fig. 84. — Ornamental design. 



CHAPTER VIII 




HOW TO WEAVE 

A SPLINT BASKET 

*^OUR enthusiasm will begin when 
you find how easily the splint can 
be cut and shaped after it has 
soaked for a while in water. It is 
delightful to work with, almost as 
soft and pliable as ribbon, while 
having more substance. Although 
there is apparently such diversit}'^ 
in the material shown in the illus- 
tration, it all comes from one roll of splint, which is uni- 
form in width and thickness. 

A basket measuring about six inches in diameter and 
three inches in height is a convenient size on which to 
learn. 

Open Your Roll of Splint, 

put two pieces to soak in a bowlful of cold water, and let 
them remain twenty minutes. Have ready a clean lap- 
board, a pair of large scissors, and an old towel. The 
lap-board not only serves for a work-table, but also keeps 
the water out of 3'our lap. 

Wipe the dripping water from the splint, and cut off six 
pieces nineteen inches long; then cut these into sixteen 
strips one-half inch wide, for the spokes of the basket. Do 
not attempt to tear the splint, for it will not tear evenly, 

68 




^■^^ 




How to Weave a Splint Basket 69 



From the other piece of splint cut four strips for weavers, 
making the first one-half of an inch wide, the next one- 
fourth of an inch wide, another one-eighth of an inch wide, 
and the last one-sixteenth of an inch wide. Place all the 
weavers in the water and leave them until you are ready to 
begin weaving. 

Take Up the Spokes, 

one at a time, and pass them between your fingers until 
they are perfectly straight and flat ; then number them all 
by writing the number with a pencil on each end of every 
spoke ; see diagram 

(Fig. 85). Lay the ^ 

spokes in front of 
you on the lap-board 
crossing the first four 
at the centre (Fig. 85). 
Place the next four 
spokes in the spaces 
between the ones you 
have just arranged 
in the order shown 
in Fig. 86, then the 
remaining eight in 
the spaces left be- 
tween these. 

For instance, the 
ninth spoke should 
come between No. i and No. 5, the tenth spoke between 
No. 5 and No. 3, the eleventh spoke between No. 3 and 
No. 6, and so on around the circle (Fig. 87). Be sure the 
lower end of a spoke fits between the same numbers as the 
upper end. When all the spokes are placed hammer a 




Fig. 85. — The first four spokes. 



70 



Handicraft for Girls 



strong- pin directly through the centre where they are 
crossed, to hold them together while vou begin. 

The Weaving 

With the spokes 13'ing in the position shown in diagram 
(Fig. 87), take the eighth-inch weaver, and begin to weave 
it in and out of the spokes. Start it under spoke No. i 
about tw^o and one-half inches from the centre, bring it 
over No. 9, under No. 5, over No. 10, under No. 3, over, 
under, over, under, until it has crossed spoke No. 16; then 

skip No. I, bring the 
7|. ,^ \veaver under N0.9, 

and weave another 
row. You wall find 
it necessar}^ to skip 
one spoke at the 
beginning of each 
row, in order to 
make a continuous 
u n d er-and-o V e r 
weave. Weave five 
r o w' s with the 
eighth-inch weaver, 
then slide the end 
under the last row% 
lapping it an inch 
or so and running 
it under several 
spokes, to hide the joint. Slip the first end under a spoke 
also. During this part of the work )^our main endeavor 
must be to weave in a perfect circle. The illustration 
shows the bottom of the basket completed. 

Before bending the spokes for the sides of the basket, 




Fig. 86. — Eight spokes in place. 




. 


BhHHHIL!' 


-'^^ 


%4 "*" Mj^y 




W^mmK^ '--^' ^Hk| 



Bottom of basket completed. 



Material for weaving basKet. 





Small basket with two rows of trimming on 
different colored weaver between. 



Lining the basket. 



How to Weave a Splint Basket 71 



let them soak in the 
water a few minutes, 
then place the work 
on the lap-board, 
the same side up as 
when started, and 
carefully bend the 
spokes up at right- 
angles with the bot- 
tom (Fig. 88). Start 
a half-inch weaver 
inside the basket, 
close to the bottom, 
and weave under 
and over until the 
row is complete; 
then, allowing for a 
lap of about three inches, 
end under the first end of 





— Bend the spokes up. 



Fig. 87.— All of the spokes in place. 

cut the weaver off and slide the 
the weaver, making the invisible 
joint by tucking each end 
undera spoke. Start the next 
row a little beyond the joint 
of the first row, that the join- 
ing may not all come in one 
place. Weave five rows of the 
half-inch weaver, then two 
rows of the fourth-inch weaver 
and then bind off (Fig. 89). 



Binding Off 

Cut the spokes off evenly, 
leaving about two inches ex- 
tending above the top of the 



72 



Handicraft for Girls 




^^"Svaojr^ 



Fig. 89. — Binding off. 



basket, then put the basket in the water, spokes down, 
and soak until pliable. Bend each spoke down snugly over 

the top weaver, and 
slip the end through 
the next weaver, 
pushing it down 
until its end is hid- 
den under one of 
the weavers. Bend 
one spoke inside, 
the next outside the 
basket, according as 
they come inside or 
outside of the top 
weaver (Fig. 89). 
This binding off holds the top weaver in place and 
makes the basket very firm ; but the spokes must be pro- 
tected from wear where they are bent, and it is necessary 
to put a double band 
around the edge. 
For this band cut 
two pieces of the 
fourth-inch weaver 
w h i c h will go 
around the basket 
and lap about an 
inch. Place one 
piece along the inside edge, the other along the outside 
edge of the basket, and with the sixteenth-inch weaver 
bind them to the top weaver, as shown in Diagram 90. 
Fasten the end bv taking several cross-stitches with the 
narrow weaver, passing it under the inside band only, and 
tucking the end under the same band. 




Fig. go. — Putting on the band. 



How to PVeave a Splint Basket 73 



The Trimming 

Many splint baskets are trimmed with twisted loops of 
the same material. For this trimming- take one of the half- 
inch weavers and cut a thread's width off its edge, making 
it just a trifle narrower than the other weaver. Insert the 
end of this weaver under a spoke at the top of the basket 
(letter A, Diagram 91), give a twist to the left, and pass it 
beneath the next spoke, as shown in Diagram 91, letter B. 
Pull the loop down and flatten it a little with your thumb, 
then twist the weaver again, this time to the right, and slip 
the end under the next spoke, letter C. Continue this 
around the basket, and make the joint of the trimming as 
you did the other 
joints, by lapping 
the ends and slip- 
ping them under 
the spokes, which 
makes the last loop 
of double thickness. 
The small basket 
shown in the illus- 
tration has two rows 
of trimming, and between them is run a weaver of another 
color pulled out into loops at the sides. 

The illustration on the first page of this chapter shows 
a large basket with four rows of trimming and handles. 
The handles are made of the fourth-inch weaver, which is 
brought around twice, making a ring of double thickness. 
The ring is then wrapped with the eighth-inch weaver, and 
fastened to the basket with loops of the same. The weav- 
ing of this large basket differs from the smaller one, in that 
the weaver is not cut at the end of each row, but is con- 




y^'Exo-va, 



Fig. 91. — Making the trimming. 



74 Handicraft for Girls 

tinned around row after row. For a large basket the half- 
inch weaver can be used in this way, but in a small basket 
the slant of the weaver as it runs around is too apparent. 
If a long weaver is used in a small basket it must not be 
more than one-eighth of an inch in width. 

While baskets of the natural white splint are extremely 
dainty, color certainly gives variety and adds interest to 
the work, and the splints will take dye readily. You might 
also line your basket with silk of a color to harmonize with 
the splint. 

The white-ash splint one and one-half inches wide comes 
in rolls of twenty-five 3^ards, and a roll will make several 
medium-sized baskets. The material may be obtained of 
almost an}^ kindergarten supply firm. 




CHAPTER IX 
MODELLING IN TISSUE-PAPER 

FEW cents will be sufficient to buy 
enough tissue-paper to model good- 
sized elephants, too large to stuff into 
the Christmas stocking, for they meas- 
ure six or seven inches in length and 
stand four or five inches high ; and you 
can make chickens nearly life-size, and 
the queer little turkeys, too. 

You must select paper of the nec- 
essary color, and fold, roll, fold, 
squeeze, fold, tie, with here a little 
pull and there a little pat, a spreading out, a pinching in; 
that is all. There is no sewing, no pasting, no pinning, 
merely modelling and tying, using only tissue-paper ana 
string. 

These animals are very substantial and unique. They 
are not at all thin or fiat, but well rounded out and lifelike, 
with character and independence enough to stand alone — 
just the kind your little brother and sister will be delighted 
with, for they may play with the toys free from all danger 
of hurts or bruises. To 

Make the Chicken 

select a sheet of tissue-paper of a soft yellow color, cut it 
through the centre, fold into two pieces. Take one of the 

75 



76 



Handicraft for Girls 



halves and gather up the long edge where it has been cut 
(Fig. 92), then gather the opposite edge (Fig. 93). Crease 
the paper as it is folded by holding One end with the right 




Fig. 92. — The beginning of the paper chicken. 



hand (Fig. 92), and drawing the paper several times 
through the partially closed left hand. This will cause it to 
retain the creases, as seen in Fig. 93. 




Fig. 93. — Second step in modelling chicken. 



Roll a separate piece of paper into a little wad and lay it 
on the creased strip (Fig. 93) about one-fourth of the dis- 




Fig. 94. — Third step in modelling chicken. 



tance from one end. Bend the short end of the strip over 
the wad of paper, as in Fig. 94; then fold up the strip 



Modelling in Tissue-paper 



11 



where the end of the short fold lies, bend this over the first 
fold (Fig. 95) and bring the loose end on the bottom of the 
three layers. Fig. 96 shows a wad of paper inserted at one 
end of a strip of creased paper folded over and over three 
times, making four 
layers, two on top 
and two on the bot- 
tom of the paper 
wad. Wind a string 
around the paper 
tight up to the wad and tie it securely to form the head 
(Fig. 97). You now have the body and head of the chicken. 
Make the legs and feet of a strip of paper about sixteen 




Fig. 95. — Fourth step in modelling chicken. 





Fig. 96. — Fifth step in modelling chicken. 



Fig. 97. — Head and body of chicken. 



inches long and seven and one-half wide. Gather up the two 
long sides with your fingers as you did the paper in Fig. 93 ; 
crease the paper, then wind each leg with string, leaving 
one inch free at each end to form the feet (Fig. 98). Lift up 




Fig. 98. — Modelling the chicken's legs. 



the free end of the folded paper (Fig. 97) and place the 
centre of the legs (Fig. 98) midway under the last fold as in 
Fig. 99. Tie the end of the loose layer of the body securely 



78 



Handicraft for Girls 



on the body, and you will have the foundation ready for 
the beak, wings, and tail (Fig. loo). 

Cut a square of the same kind of tissue paper, measur- 
ing nine and one-half inches on all four sides ; fold diago- 




Fig. 99. — Modelling body and legs of chicken. 



nally twice across the square as when making a paper pin- 
wheel. The centre of the square is exactly where the 
diagonal lines meet and cross ; pinch the centre portion up 
into a beak and tie it with a string (Fig. loi) ; then fit the 




Fig. 100. — Partially modelled ready for beak, wings and tail. 

beak over the centre of the chicken's head, bringing the 
paper entirely over the head on all sides ; tie the square 
around the chicken's neck close up to the head (Fig. 102). 



Modelling in Tissue-paper 79 




Fig. loi. — The beak of chicken. 




Fig. 102. — ^Modelling beak on chicken. 



8o 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 103. 
Paper chicken 
nearly finished. 



The two points A 
and B of the square 
must form the wings, 
while C is carried 
backward over the 
under portion of the 
body and D back 
over the upper part, 
the two ends C and 
D being brought 



together and tied tight 
up to the body to form 
the tail. In Fig. 103 you 
will see exactly how to 
pinch up the wing if you 
notice particularly the 
■o upper part of the wing 
B, next to the body. The 
wing A on Fig. 103 shows 
how the two wings must 
be tied close to, but not 
on, the body. When each 
wing is tied, make the 
tail of C and D by tying 
the extensions together 
as explained above ; that 
done, bend down the legs, 
spread out the wings and 




Fig. 104. 

Hungry little paper 

chicken. 



^^^'^^-s-i 



Modelling in Tissue-paper 



8i 



tail, open out and flatten the feet, then stand the little 
chicken on a level surface (Fig. 104). Remember always 
to crease the tissue- 
paper with the grain oi 
the paper; if you at- 
tempt to cross the grain 
the paper will be very 
apt to tear. 

The Turkey 

(Fig. 105) is also mod- 
elled from half a sheet 
of tissue-paper as near 
the general color of a 
turkey as can be found. 
Make Fig. 92 and Fig. 
93 of the paper; then 
fold Fig. 93 five and 
th ree-quarter inches 
from one end (Fig. 106, 
F). Three inches from 
this end tie the two layers together (Fig. 106, G). Fold 
the strips back and tie a string through the lower loop 




Fig. 105. — The astonished paper turkey. 




Fig. 106. — ModelHng turkey's body. 



up over the loose top laver (Fig. 106, H). Wind the ex- 
treme end of the paper (Fig. 106, O), with string to form 



82 



Handicraft for Girls 



the beak (Fig. 107), bend the beak down and tie it to 
the neck to form the top of the head (Fig. 108, P). Make 

the legs and feet as you did 
those for the chicken (Fig. 98) 
and slide them through the body 
so that one fold of the body will 
be above and 
two beneath 
the legs (Fig, 
107). Cut 
the wings 
from a separate piece of tissue- 
paper (Fig. 109). Let the paper 
measure seven inches on the 
widest side, five on the opposite 
side, and four and one-half on 
Pinch the paper together through 




Fig. 107. — Legs and feet of turkey. 

each of the other sides. 




Fig. 108. — Head modelled on turkey. 



Modelling in Tissue-paper 



83 



the centre and tie (Fig. 1 10). Gather up one wing, so that it 
will not tear, and slip it through the body, immediately over 
the legs, with the widest side toward the front (Fig. 105), 



Fig. 109. — Paper for turkey wings. 



leaving the other wing out free on the other side of the tur- 
key. Bend down the legs, spread the tail out fan shape 




Fig. no. — Turkey wings. 



and bend it up ; open out the wings and drop them down- 
ward and forward (Fig. 105). Flatten out the feet and 
stand up the turkey (Fig. 105). 

The Elephant 

(Fig. in) will require two sheets of brown tissue-paper for 
its body, head, and trunk, which are all made of a single 
strip of paper. Unfold, spread out and fit the two sheets of 



84 



Handicraft for Girls 



tissue-paper together; then gather up one side, as in Fig. 
92, crease and gather up the other side (Fig. 93). Bind one 
end with black thread to the distance of four and one-half 
inches to form the trunk; then fold the remainder of the 
strip into four layers, beginning with the free end of the 
paper; fold over and over three times. This gives the body 




Fig. III. — Elephant modelled of tissue-paper. 

and head. Bind black thread around the folds next to the 
trunk to form the head. Make four legs of two pieces of 
paper in the same way you formed those of the chicken 
(Fig. 98), only" the elephant's legs must be very much 
thicker. Slide the legs through the body between the two 
layers of paper, shove the front legs forward and the hind 
legs backward. For the tail use a small strip of the brown 
tissue-paper. Wrap it around and around with black thread 
to within an inch of the bottom and cut this end up into 
fringe. Fasten the tail on the elephant with black thread, 



Modelling in Tissue-paper 



85 



pass the thread between the first and second layers of paper 
forming the back of the body of the animal and tie the tail 
on the outside threads which cross from side to side of the 
elephant ; bend the top of the tail over the thread, as you 
would hang a garment on a clothesline, and tie the bent- 
over end down on to the tail proper. Shape the ears like 
Fig. 112, pinch together the end S and tuck it under the 
thread which separates the head from the 
body. Allow the long side, M, to form the 
front of the ears. You can add white ivory 
tusks if desired. Roll up two white writ- 
ing-paper lighters and push an end of each 
up in the head under the trunk, forming 
one tusk on each side. 

In making these little creatures do not 
forget that you must do some modelling, 
bending and shaping them with your fingers, 
squeezing up the paper where it stands out Fig- "2-— Elephant's 
too far, and gently pulling it out in places 
where it flattens too much. The heads can be turned to 
suit the fancy, the bodies inclined this or that way, or they 
may stand stiff and erect. You might model a number of 
chickens, of different-colored paper, some yellow, some 
white, and others black, like real chickens; or make several 
turkeys and two or three elephants, some of the latter with 
tusks and others without. The toys when finished will 
cause exclamations of delight and approval. They are 
simple and easy to put together, something which will not 
cost much and yet be worth many times the amount ex- 
pended for the necessary material to manufacture. The 
little animals are attractive, substantial toys, entirely 
different from the common ones which any girl or boy 
with sufficient pocket money may purchase. 




CHAPTER X 



NATURE STUDY WITH TISSUE-PAPER 




NATURAL flower, some tissue-paper, a 
pair of scissors, a spool of thread, and 
nimble fingers are all you need. 

There are no patterns, only circles 
and squares and strips of paper 
which you gather here, spread out 
there, wrap and tie some place else 
and, with deft fingers, model into 
almost exact reproductions of the 
natural flower before you. 

With its unfamiliar terms to be 
committed to memory and the many parts of the flower 
to be distinguished, botany is apt to prove dry and tire- 
some to the little child, but to study nature by copying 
the flowers in this marvellously adaptable material is only 
a beautiful game which every child, and indeed many 
grown people, will delight in. The form of the flower, 
its name and color, may, by this means, be indelibly stamped 
upon the memory, and a good foundation laid for further 
study. 

The Best Models 

Ordinary garden flowers and those most easily procured 
make the best models. The carnation-pink, the morning- 
glory, and the rarer blossoms of the hibiscus, are well 

S6 



Nature Study With Tissue-paper 87 



adapted to the work, also the daffodil and some of the won- 
derful orchids. 

Even holly with its sharp-spiked leaves and scarlet ber- 
ries and the white-berried, pale-green mistletoe may be 
closely copied. All these and many more are made on the 
same principle and in so simple a manner even quite a lit- 
tle child may succeed 
in producing very good 
copies from Nature. 

Material 

Buy a sheet of light 
pink tissue-paper, another 
of darker pink, and one 
of the darkest red you 
can find. Then a sheet 
of light yellow-green and 
one of dark green. Have 
a table " cleared for ac- 
tion " and place your 
paper on the right-hand 
side, adding a pair of 
scissors and a spool of 
coarse thread, or, better 
still, of soft darning-cot- 
ton. 

With all this you are to copy the 




Carnations modelled from tissue-paper. 



Carnation-pink 

which someone has given you or you have growing in your 
own garden. Make one of your light pink paper, one of 
the darker pink, and another of the rich, deep red to have 
a variety. 



88 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 113.- 



-Fold the square diagonally through 
the centre. 



Lay jour natural flower down on the left-hand side of 
the table, away from your material but quite within easy 

reach, for it must be con- 
sulted frequently. Seat 
yourself comfortably and 
don't work hurriedly. 

The first thing neces- 
sary in this system of 
squares and circles is to 
know 

How to Cut a Circle 
Quickly, 

easily and accuratel}^ and 

always without a pattern. 

Here is a method which 

never fails : 

Cut a square the size you wish to make your circle. 
That is, if you want a circle with a diameter of four inches 
cut a four-inch square (Fig. 
113). Fold the square di- 
agonally through the cen- 
tre according to the dotted 
line on Fig. 113, and you 
have the triangle (Fig. 1 14). 
Fold this at the dotted 
line and it will make 
another triangle (Fig. 115). 
Again fold through the 
middle and 3'ou have the 
third triangle (Fig. 116). 
Fold once more and Fig. 
117 is the result. Measure ■ Fig. 114.— The first triangle. 




Nature Study With Tissue-paper 89 



the distance from the edge, B, to the centre A in Fig. 117 
and mark the same distance on the other side of the angle 
shown by the dot, C (Fig. 117), With your scissors cut 





Fig. 115. — Second triangle. 



Fig. 116. — Third triangle. 



across from C to B, curving the edge slightly, as shown by 
the dotted line from C to B (Fig. 118). Fig. 1 19 is the circle 
still in its folds. Fig. 120 is the circle opened, the dotted 
lines indicating where it has been folded. 

Your eye will soon become sufficiently accurate to en- 






Fig. 117. — Fold 
once more. 



Fig. 118. — Cut 
from C to B, curv- 
ing the edge. 



Fig. 119. — The 
circle still in its 
folds. 



able you to gauge the distance from A to B, and you can 
then cut from C to B without measuring. 

Before Beginning Your Flower 

take up the natural one and examine it carefully. You will 
notice that it has a great many petals crowded closely to- 



90 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 120. — The circle opened. 

not noticeable except as 
appearance, and the edge 
It is this last ap- 
pearance or the 
impression of the 
flower that you are 
to produce rather 
than its many and 
separate little 
parts. So now to 
work. 

Cut Two Squares 
for Each Pink, 

one measuring five 
and one - quarter 
inches, the other 
four and three- 
quarter inches, and 



gether and that their edges 
are pointed like a saw. 
You will also see that the 
green calyx is wrapped 
snugly around the lower 
part of the flower and 
that it, too, has a pointed 
edge. 

Now hold the pink off 
at arm's length. The sep- 
arateness of the petals 
disappears and you see 
them only as a mass ; the 
points on the edges are 
thev give the flower a crimped 
of the calyx looks almost straight. 




Fig. 121. — The petals. 



Nature Study With Tissue-paper 91 



turn them into circles (Fig. 121) by the method just ex- 
plained. Take one of the circles at the centre, where the 
folding lines cross, with the tips of the fingers of your left 
hand and pinch it together ; then, while still hold- 
ing it, crimp the edge with the fingers of your right 
hand (Fig. 122). Do this always with every kind of 

flower, whether it is made of 
circles or squares. Without 
loosening your hold of the 
centre, draw the paper lightly 
through your right hand sev- 
eral times, then crimp the 
edge again, this time with 
the blade of your scissors. 
Treat all the circles alike, 
then place a small circle in- 
side a larger one and draw 
them through your hand to 
bring them together, pinch- 
ing them closely until within 
a little over an inch of the 
edge (Fig. 123). Make a slen- 
der lighter of ordinary writ- 
ing-paper (Fig. 124), snip off 
the point of the flower (D, 
Fig. 123), open the other end 
a little and push the lighter 
through until its head is hid- 
den. This forms the stem. 




Jfig, 122. — Crimp the edge with 
your fingers. 




Fig. 123. — Draw these through 
your hand to bring them 
closely together. 



Fig. 124. 
— Make 

Wrap and tie with thread at ughter. 

the bottom of the flower (Fig. 
125), and again where the petals spread. This last is 
to be but temporary, as you will remove the thread when 



92 



Handicraft for Girls 




the flower is sufficiently pressed 
together to hold its shape. 

From your lig-ht-green paper cut 
a circle measuring three and one- 
quarter inches through its diameter 
and cut it in two to make the half 
circle for the calyx (Fig. 126). Remove the thread that 
holds the flower just below its petals and wrap the calyx 
closely around the lower part, tying it at the bottom ; 



ji J4 'mcVies 
Fig. 126.— The calyx. 





Fig. 125.— Wrap and tie at the bottom 
and where the petals spread. 



Fig. 127. — Wrap the paper spirally around 
the stem. 



Nature Study With Tissue-paper 93 

then cut a narrow strip of dark-green paper and wrap it 
spirally around the stem, beginning at the top (Fig. 127). 
Let the wrapper extend a little below the lighter and twist 
the end to hold it in place. Spread the petals of your 
flower as much like the natural blossom as possible. 



v9 



Fig. 128. 
The leaves. 



Leaves 

For the leaves cut a strip of 
dark-green paper six inches long 
and three-quarters of an inch wide 
(Fig. 128). Find the centre by fold- 
ing the paper end to end and mak- 
ing the crease shown by dotted 
line in Fig. 128. Gather it along 
this line, not with needle and 
thread — we use no needle in this 
work — but with your fingers, and 
pinch it together ; then twist each 
end into a point (Fig. 129). With 
the sharp point of your scissors 
punch a hole directly through the 
centre (E, Fig. 129), and push the 
point of the stem through the hole, 
bringing the leaves as far up on 
the stem as you find them on the 




Fig. 129. — Twist each 
end into a point. 



natural flower ; then wrap and tie them in place. 



The Bud 

is made of a circle of dark-green paper the diameter of 
which is three and one-quarter inches (Fig. 130). Gather 
this circle between your fingers as you did the others and 
crimp the edge with the scissors. It will then form a little 



94 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 131 



bag- or cup like Fig. 131. Slip the bag over the head of a 
lighter and tie at the bottom as in Fig. 132. If the bud does 
not take the proper shape at first, model it with your fingers 
until it is correct. Start the wrapping of the stem just above 

where the bud is tied and 
finish as you did the stem 
of the pink. Use small 
leaves on the bud stem, 
having the strip of paper 
just as wide, but consid- 
erably shorter than for 
the leaves on the stem 
of the open flower. 

It is wonderful how 
Fig. i3o.-The bud. very natural these blos- 

soms appear. At a short 
distance no one would think they are not the real, old 
and familiar pinks. Only the fragrance is missing, and 
that may also be supplied and a spicy odor /^ 

given by enclosing a whole clove in the heart 
of each flower. 

The Morning-Glory 

From your pale-pink paper you can make 
the delicately beautiful morning-glory. Have 
the natural flower with its stem and leaves to 
copy from, even if the blossom is not the color 
you want. As with the pink, it is the general 
form and appearance we strive for in the morn- 
ing-glory, not the detail. 

Make your pink circles with a diameter of 
about seven inches. It is always better to have your flowers 
a trifle larger than the natural ones, rather than smaller. 




Fig. 132. — Slip 
the bag over 
the head of a 
lighter. 



Nature Shtdy With Tissue-paper 95 




But one circle is required 
for each morning-glory. 
Crimp this in your fingers 
and draw through your hand 
as you did the circles for the 
pinks ; then, pinching it to- 
gether to within one and one- 
half inches of the edge, hold 
it in your left hand and flatten 
out the top as in Fig. 133. 
See that the fulness is evenly 
distributed, and pull and 
straighten out the edges until 
you are satisfied with its ap- 
pearance. 

K piece of bonnet-wire 



Morning-glory modelled from tissue-paper. 

makes the best stem if you 
wish to give the true viney 
effect of the growth. If it 
is only the blossom you are 
making, a paper light- 
er will answer. When 
you use the wire bend 
one end over to form 
a small loop ; this is 
to keep the stem 
from slipping through 
the flower. Pass the 




Fig- 133- — Flatten out the top of the flower 



96 



Handicraft for Girls 



I 






straight end of the wire 
through the centre of the 
flower and draw it down 
until the loop is hidden. 
Make 



Fig. 134- — Green square for calyx. 



The Calyx , 

of a square of light-green 
paper measuring about 
four and one-half inches. 
Fold the square four 
times through the centre 
to form the creases shown 
by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 134. Hold the square at tiie centre and draw the 
edges down as in Fig. 135; then bring the two edges to- 
gether in gathers, just below one of the corners, to form 
a leaf-shaped point as in 
Fig. 136. Gather below 
each corner, tie as in Fig. 
137, and twist each cor- 




Fig. 135. — Draw the edges down. 



Fig. 136. — Form a leaf-shaped point. 



Nature Study PVith Tissue-paper 97 




ner into a sharp point like F, Fig. 137. Draw the calyx 
through your hand, bringing- the points together (Fig. 138). 
Push the calyx up on 
the stem and tie just 
at the base of the flower, 
then tie again about 
three-quarters of an inch 
below and wrap the re- 
mainder of the calyx 
close to the stem. Wind 
the stem with light- 
green tissue-paper and 
bend it as the natural 
one is bent and curved. 
Make several buds 
of the pink paper, fol- 
lowing the directions 
given for the green bud 
of the pink; then twist each bud at the point and add a 
calyx. 

The wilted flower shown in the illustration is made by 
taking one of the morning-glories you have just finished 

and actually wilting it by draw- 
ing the flower together and creas- 
ing and pressing it to resemble 
the partially closed and drooping 
natural blossom. 

Only a piece of dark-green 
paper six inches square is re- 
quired to model two almost perfectly shaped morning-glory 
leaves. 

Fold the square twice diagonally across from corner to 
corner to find its centre ; then begin at one corner and 



Fig- 137- — Twist each corner into a point. 




Fig. 138. — Bring the points together. 



98 



Handicraft for Girls 



gather along one of the creases until you reach the centre 
(Fig. 139). Start again at the opposite corner, gather 




Fig. 139. — Gather along one of the creases. 



along the crease to the centre, then wrap and tie (Fig. 140). 
Pinch each leaf from underneath along the crease in the 
middle, to give the depression at the midrib. Straighten 
the leaf out a little at its widest part and you will find you 




Fig. 140. — The morning-glory leaves. 



Nature Study With Tissue-paper 99 



\ 



have made a pair of leaves which are 
surprisingly natural. Wrap and tie these 
to the stem and make as many more as 
you think are needed. 

The Daffodil 

is of such a different nature it hardly 
seems possible that it can be made on 
the same principle as the other flowers, 
yet the work is practically the same. 

Match the tint of your natural daf- 
fodil in yellow tissue-paper as nearly as 
possible, and then cut two squares for 
each flower measuring about five and 
one-half inches. Fold the squares cross- 
wise and diagonally through the centre 
as you did for the calyx of the morning- 
glory (Fig. 134), and cut one square in Daffodils modelled from 
half along one of its diagonal folds tissue-paper. 





Fig. 141. — For the two extra petals. 



t.ofC. 



lOO 



Hamiicraff fo^ Girls 




Fig 14a. — Pinch and tie in place. 



(Fig. 141). Gather the 
square two and a quarter 
inches below each corner 
and tie as in Fig. 137, but 
do not twist the points. 
This gives you four pet- 
als, but as the daffodil has 
six, vou must make two 
more from the triangu- 
lar halves of the square 
vou have just cut. Gather 



each triangle across from side to side, ac- 
cording to the dotted line in Fig. 141. and 
pinch and tie in place as in Fig. 142, mak- 
ing sure the petal is of exactlv the same 
size as those on the square. Bring to- 
gether the fan of paper left below the 
petal and wrap and tie as in Fig. 143, 
then cut otY the ragged end (Fig. 144). 




Fig. 144. — Cut 
off the ragged 
end. 




|i 




Fig. 145. — Fit each loose petal between two 
of the others. 



Fig. 143. — Bring to- 
gether the fan of 
paper below the 
pet&l. 



Nature Study l/Vith Tissue-paper loi 





Fig. 146. — Pinch the cup together. 



Fig. 147. — Slip the cup on your 
finger like a thimble. 



Draw the petals of the square together as you did the calyx, 
and insert the stem made of a paper lighter. Put in place 
the two extra petals, pushing 
the wrapped ends down into 
the heart of the flower; fit 
each loose petal between two 
of the others and tie (Fig. 145). 
Turn back to the bud of 
the pink (Fig. 130), and from 
a circle of the yellow paper, 
with a diameter of four inches, 
make the cup (Fig. 131), using 
the scissors to give a fine crimp 
to the edges. Pinch the cup 
together at the bottom almost 
half-way up and tie (Fig. 146) ; 
slip it on your finger like a 
thimble and press it into 
shape like Fig. 147. Insert 
the point or stem of the 

CUD into the centre of the ^•^- ^^S— insert the stem of the cup into 
cup HlLU LUC CCUUC Ul LUC the centre of the flower. 




I02 Handicraft for Girls 

flower and tie in place just below the petals (Fig. 
148). 

Cut a two and three-quarter-incli square from light- 
brown paper and divide it diagonally in half for the calyx. 
Examine your natural daffodil and notice how loosely the 
calyx seems to be wrapped around the flower. Imitate this 
by leaving the point loose at the top, while you wrap the 
bottom of the calyx closely around the stem. Allow the 
wrapping for the stem to cover the lower part of the brown 
calyx. Make several long, narrow leaves from strips of 
dark-green paper, two inches wide and of varying lengths. 
Twist one end of each leaf into a point and, gathering the 
other end, draw it through your hands until it stands up 
stiffly. Wrap each leaf partly around the stem and tie in 
place, following as closely as possible the natural growth of 
the leaf on the stem. Bend the stem just below each flower, 
being careful not to break the paper lighter which forms it. 

If you use thread the color of the flowers for tying and 
green for the stems the effect will be almost perfect. 



CHAPTER XI 



A NEW RACE OF DOLLS 




IKE the little animals, these dolls are modelled 
of tissue-paper and they are equally substan- 
tial and durable. The dolls, as well 
as their dresses, shoes, and bonnets, are 
made without taking a stitch or using 
glue or paste. Nothing could be 
prettier or more suitable to hang 
on the Christmas-tree than these 
little ladies decked out in their fluffy 
tissue- 
paper skirts, and nothing will 
give greater delight to the chil- 
dren. 

To make 

Little Miss Muffett 



you will need eight sheets of 
white tissue-paper, two sheets 
of flesh pink, not too deep in 
color, a quarter of a sheet of 
light-brown or yellow, and a 
small piece of black. Her un- 
derclothes will require one 
sheet of white and her dress 

103 




Here she comes. Little Miss Muffett. 



I04 



Handicyaft for Girls 



and bonnet one sheet of any color you consider most be- 
coming-. 

Take one sheet of the white paper at a time and draw it 
lengthwise through your hands, creasing or crimping it as 




Fig. 149. — Creased tissue-paper for making doll. 



in Fig. 149. 
six of them 
another and 




Fig. 150. — Six 
sheets of tissue- 
paper folded to- 
gether for mak- 
ing doll. 




Fig. 151. — Head 
of doU. 



Do this to all the eight sheets. Then, pulling 
partly open, place them evenlv one on top of 
fold through the middle (Fig. 150). Take an- 
other sheet of the crimped 
paper and roll it into a ball 
like Fig. 151. Open the fold- 
ed paper, place the ball in the 
middle, bring the paper down 
over the ball and wrap and tie 
just below with coarse linen 
thread or white darning-cot- 
ton (Fig. 152). This is the 
head, which you must model 
into shape with your fingers, 
squeezing it out to make it 
fuller and rounder at the back 
and pinching it to give a chin 
to the face. Fold another 
crimped sheet like Fig. 153 
for the arms. You will notice 
the ends do not quite reach 
the folds. The space left _ tt . ^ ^ 

\ Fig. 152. — Head tied 

should measure a little over on body. 




A New Race of Dolls 



105 




Fig- 153- — Beginning the arms. 




Fig- 154- — Pink paper over arms. 



Fig. 155. — Outside of arms tied over inside. 



one inch. Crimp half a sheet of the pink paper and with it 

cover the arms ; allow the pink to extend equally at each 

end beyond the white and fold over the ends, tying them 

as in Fig. 154. Then tie the 

loose ends down as in Fig. 

155. Open the paper just 

below the head, slip the 

arras in place and tie below 

(Fig. 156). 

Spread out your smooth 

sheet of pink paper, place 

the doll's head directly in 

the centre and draw the 

paper down over head and 

body ; keep it as smooth as 

possible over the face and 

wrap and tie at the neck (Fig. 157). Push the pink paper 

up on the shoulders and cut a slit about six inches long 

lengthwise through the middle of the entire mass of paper, 

as shown in Fig. 157. Wrap 
and tie each of the legs (Fig, 
158) and tie once more un- 
der the arms (Fig. 161). 
Fold the bottom edges un- 
der and model the feet in 
shape (Fig. 158). The wrap- 
pings at the thighs and 
knees take slanting lines, 
which give a more natural 
shape to the legs than if the 
thread were simply wrapped 
round and round as at the 

Fig. 156.— Arms in place. anklcS. 




io6 



Handicraft for Girls 



Paint the Face 



m. 



of Little Miss Muffett with water-colors, placing the feat- 
ures low on the head to give a babyish look, and make 
the eyes large and mouth small. Color the cheeks and 




Fig. 157- — The pink skin of tissue-paper over doll. 



Fig. 158. — Modelling legs of doll. 



chin a deeper pink, and put little touches of red just above i 
the eyes near the inner corners and little streaks of blue 
just below the eyes. 

Miss Muffett's curls are furnished by 

The Wig, 

which you are to make of brown or yellow paper, or black 
if you want a little brunette. 



A New Race of Dolls 



107 



Cut a circle seven and one-half 
inches in diameter, and on the edge 
cut a fringe one inch in depth (Fig. 
159). This is the hair, which you 
must curl by drawing it lightly over 
the blade of a penknife or scissors 

(Fig- 159)- 

Fit the wig on Miss Muffett's head, 
holding it in place with pins until 
you can tie it on just back of the curls (Fig. 161) 

Now for the little lady's clothes. To make 




m 

Fig. 159. — The wig. 



The Shoes, 

which will be her first article of dress, cut out of the black 
tissue-paper two circles measuring four and one-half inches 
in diameter (Fig, 160); place one 
foot in the middle of a circle, draw 
the paper up around the ankle and 
wrap a number of times before 
tying. Put the other shoe on the 
other foot in the same manner, and 
The shoe. your doll will look like Fig. 161. 





Fig. 160.— Pattern 
of shoe. 



Miss Muffett's Lingerie 

consists of a union garment (Fig. 162) and a white skirt 
(Fig. 163). From one end of your remaining sheet of white 
paper cut a strip about seven inches wide, and at the middle 
cut a slit half-way up (Fig. 162). Draw this through your 
hands to crimp it, the creases to run lengthwise, that is, 
from top to bottom. Fit the little garment to the body, 
tying it just below the arms and again above the knees, 
where it will form ruflfles. 



io8 



Handicraft for Girls 



Cut the white skirt in a circle seventeen inches in di- 
ameter with a circular opening in the centre (^Fig. 163). 

Crimp the skirt and put it on over 
the feet, not the head, of the doll, 
wrapping and tying it in place 
around the waist. 

Not only mav tissue-paper be 
purchased in all colors, with their 
various shades and tints, but in 
prett}^ little checks, plaids, and fig- 
ures as well, so Miss Muffett may 
have a dress equal in appearance to 
the cotton or silk gown of her china 
sisters. 

Cut the skirt of 

The Dress 

after the white skirt pattern (Fig. 
163), and the waist like the smaller 
circle (Fig. 164), which has one slit, 

from outer to inner edge, added to the opening at the 

centre. 

This waist circle should measure ten inches in diameter. 

Do not crimp the dress skirt, but put it on in all its crisp 




Fig. 161. — Ready to be dressed. 




Fig. 162. — Union garment. 



freshness, and tie in place at the waist-line. Adjust the 
waist on Miss Muffett, bringing the slit opening at the back. 



A New Race of Dolls 



109 



It looks very much like a cape now, doesn't it ? But draw 
the fulness in at the bottom and around the arms at the 




Fig. 163. — ^White skirt. 




Fig. 164. — Waist pattern. 



shoulders, and you have a little waist with full short 
sleeves. Tie the waist rather high, and bring it down to 




Fig. 165. — Pattern for sun-bonnet. 




Fig, 166. — Bonnet folded. 



bag slightly over the skirt as shown in the illustration of 
Miss Muffett. Cut 



no 



Handicraft for Girls 



The Sun-Bonnet 

of the same paper as the dress. Fig. 165 shows the pattern, 
which is ten inches long and nine inches wide. Fold the 
straightedge over three times, according to the dotted lines 
in Fig. 165, making the folds one and one-quarter inches 
wide. Fig. 166 shows the bonnet folded, and the dotted 
line around the curve indicates where it is to 
be gathered in at the neck. 

Fit Fig. 166 on Miss Muffett's head, allow- 
ing the folded edge to extend slightly beyond 
her face, then draw the bonnet down at the 
back and gather it in with your fingers until it 
sits snugly to the neck. Through the middle 
of the fold, one inch from each end, puncture 
a hole, and through these two holes pass the thread that 
goes around the back of the bonnet and ties under Miss 
Muffett's chin. See illustration of sun-bonnet. 




The sun-bonnet. 



CHAPTER XII 



AN INDIAN ENCAMPMENT 




Take for 



Indian encampment for your very own! 
A wigwam, camp-fire. Indian travois, blan- 
ket-weaving loom, gorgeous feathered 
head-dress, bow, arrows and shield, 
tomahawk, wampum, and a little cop- 
per-colored papoose in its funny stiff 
cradle, hanging on a tree entirely 
alone ! Does not all that sound 
delightful? The complete scene 
can actually be made to appear 
in your room at home. 

The Ground 



a common pastry-board or any kind of board of the desired 
size — -about nineteen by twenty-six inches — and for grass 
cover one side and the four edges of the board with a piece 
of light-green cotton flannel stretched tight, fleece side up, 
and tacked to the under side of the board. Sprinkle sand 
and small stones on the grass at one side of the wigwam, to 
show where the grass has been worn off by the tramping of 
the Indians, the bronco pony, and the dog, for all Indians 
possess dogs of some description. If you have a toy dog of 
suitable size, stand him by the fire where he will be com- 
fortable. Before the red men owned horses, a dog was al- 
ways used to drag the travois, and to this day the braves 
care as much for a dog as does any pale-faced boy — which 

III 



112 



Handicraft for Girls 



: 




Fig. 167. — Home-made compass. 



is saying much, for a white boy and any kind of a dog- make j 
devoted friends and comrades. 

Now that we have our camping-ground, the first thing 
we must do is to 

Put Up the Wigwam 

for shelter. Draw an eight-inch diameter circle on the 
grass near one end of the ground. Fold a strip of paper 

lengthwise, stick a pin 
through one end of the paper 
and drive it down into the 
board where you wish the 
centre of the circle, push the 
point of a lead pencil 
through the other end of 
the paper four inches from 
the pin ; keep the pin steady 
while you move the pencil around many times until a 
circle appears plainly on the grass (Fig. 167). 

Cut twelve slender sticks eleven inches long and sharpen 
the heavy end of each into a flat point (Fig. 168). The sticks 
must be straight, for they are wigwam-poles. Tie three 
poles together two inches 
from their tops and spread 
out the sharpened ends at 
nearlv equal distances apart 
on the circle line ; mark the spots where the_y rest and bore 
gimlet-holes in each place through the cloth into the wood. 
Enlarge each hole with a penknife and insert the poles, push- 
ing the sharpened points down firml}^ into the holes (Fig. 
169), Add seven more poles around the circle, keeping the 
spaces between all about even. Sink these last poles in the 
ground as you did the first three ; then tie the tops together 



Fig. 168. — Pole sharpened to flat point. 



An Indian Encampni.ent 



113 



around the first three poles, 
and you will have the wig- 
wam frame-work of ten 
poles standing- strong and 
firm. 

Make the cover of un- 
bleached or brown-tinted 
cotton cloth cut like Fig. 
170. Mark the curved 
lower edge with the home- 
made compass used for the 
grass circle. Fasten the 
pin and pencil in the paper 
strip nine and one-half in- 
ches apart ; draw almost a 




Fig. iSg.^First three poles planted firmly in 
edge of circle for wigwam. 




Fig. 170. — Cover for wigwam. 



114 Handicraft for Girls 

half circle, then an inch and a half from the spot A (Fig. 
170), where the pin is stationed, begin to cut the opening 
for the top of the wigwam poles, B (Fig. 170). Slash the 
point C in as far as D, sew pieces of cloth over the points 
E and E, leaving the opening at dotted lines to form pockets 
for the smoke-poles. Cut two rows of little holes on each 
side of the upper part of the wigwam to run the pinsticks 
through when fastening the wigwam together (Fig. 171). 

Now comes the fun of decorating the cover. Pin the 
cloth out flat and smooth, and paint in brilliant red, yellow, 
black, green, white, and blue the designs given in Fig. 170. 
When finished, fit the cover over the wigwam-poles and 
with short, slender sticks pin the fronts together. Peg the 
lower edge down to the ground with short black pins and 
slide a pole in each pocket of the smoke-flaps E and E (Fig, 
170). Bring the poles around and cross them at the back of 
the wigwam. As you do this you will exclaim with delight 
at the result, for the little wigwam will be very realistic. 

In front of your wigwam or tepee 

Build a Make-Believe Fire 

of bits of orange and scarlet tissue-paper mixed in with 
short twigs, and then you must manufacture something to 
cook in. Bore a hole in the ground near the fire and fit in 
the fire-pole, making it slant over to one side and hang 
directly above the fire. Place a stone over the embedded 
end of the pole to keep it firm. Suspend an acorn kettle or 
any little kettle of the right size for the Indians to use on the 
pole and the camp will begin to look cosey for the red men 
to enjoy. Hunt up a jointed doll about five inches high, 
paint it copper color, ink its hair, and the doll will be a 
fairly 



An Indian Encampment 



115 



Good Indian. 



If you can find a Zulu doll of the required size, with long, 
straight black hair, and give him a wash of dull red paint,' 




Fig. 171. — Wigwam witbi make-believe camp-fire 



you can turn him into a fine Indian. Failing these dolls, 
I make an Indian doll of dull red raffia or cloth. This you 



ii6 



Handicraft for Girls 




can do if you try, and remember to have your red man a lit- 
tle more slender than store dolls ; most of these are rather 
too stout to make good Indians. 

Real chiefs like Turning Eagle, Swift Dog, Crazy Bull, 

and others, wore gor- 
geous feather head- 
dresses, and gloried in 
^ the strange war bonnets, 
not because they were 
gay and startling, but 
for the reason that each 
separate feather in the 
head-band meant that the owner had per- 
formed a brave deed of which the tribe was 
proud, and the greater the number of brave 
deeds the greater the number of feathers ; 
consequently the longer the bonnet-trail. This 
explains the real meaning of the common ex- 
pression, "A feather in 3'our cap." 

Your Indian must be a mighty chief and 
will need a very long- trailing 

War Bonnet. 

Cut the head-dress like Fig. 172 of white 
paper. Paint all the paper horse-hair tips on 
the paper eagle feathers red, the tops of the 
feathers black, and the band in which they 
are fastened yellow, red, and green, leaving 
white spaces between the colors (Fig. 173). 
Cut out, then turn the end of the band F 
(Fig. 172) until the loop fits the Indian's head, 
and glue the end of the loop on the strip 



f 



An Indian Encampment 



117 




Fig- 173. — ^Indian 
war bonnet 



(Fig. 173). Paste fringed 
yellow paper around each of 
the chieftain's feet, fringed 
edge uppermost, to serve 
as moccasins. Part the 
Indian's hair at the back, 
bring the two divisions in 
front, one on each side of 
the head, and wind each 
with scarlet worsted as the 
real Indian wears his hair, 
then wrap around your red man a soft, dull- 
colored cloth extend- 
ing from the waist to 
the knees. Pin the 
drapery in place and 
the chief will be ready 
to take charge of his 
bronco pony, which 
may be any toy horse 
you happen to pos- 
sess. The horse in 
the illustration is an 
ordinary cloth toy. 

Red men are not 
fond of remaining 
long in one place, and 
naturally your Indian 
will soon want to 
break camp and carry 
his belongings else- 
where. Help him 
prepare by making 




ii8 



Handicraft for Girls 



A Travois. 

You will need four slender poles, two fifteen and one-half 
inches long, one five and one-half and another six and one- 
half inches long. Bind the six-and-a-half-inch pole across 
the two long poles four inches from their heavy ends; fas- 
ten the five-and-a-half-inch pole across the long poles two 
and one-half inches above the first cross-piece. Instead of 




Fig. 175. — Travois ready for camping outfit, 



thongs of buffalo hide, such as the real red man would use, 
take narrow strips of light-brown cloth to form the rude 
net-work over the space bounded by the four poles. Tie 
the top ends of the long poles together (Fig. 174), then tie 
the travois to the horse, as in Fig. 175. In most of these 
conveyances the thongs are tied across one way only, from 
short pole to short pole, forming a ladder-like arrangement. 
A chief must always have his 



An Indian Encampment 



119 



Calumet, 

or " pipe of peace," to smoke and pass around the council 
circle, when all the leaders of the different tribes meet to 
talk over important matters concerning H 

the welfare of their people. Real calu- 
mets are generally large and of goodly 
length, some of them being four feet long. 
They are made of dull-red stone, which, 
when first cut from the large mass, is soft 



n ) 



a. 



.G, 



Fig. 176. — Different parts of straw calumet. 



enough to be carved out with a knife ; later the pipe be- 
comes hard and capable of receiving a polish. But as 
the red stone is not within our reach, we must use dull red- 
colored straw for the calumet. Soak the straw in hot water 




Fig- 177. — Calumet finished. 

to render it less brittle. Then cut a three-inch length 
piece ; make a hole in it a short distance from one end (Fig. 
176, G) and insert a three-quarter inch length of straw for 
the pipe bowl (Fig. 176, H). For the mouthpiece take a 



I20 



Handicraft for Girls 



half-inch length of white straw (Fig. 176, I), and slide it in 
the other end of the pipe. Glue both bowl and mouth- 
piece in place and decorate the calumet with red, green, 
and white silk floss tied on the pipe stem (Fig. 177). 



K 



(DO 




The Tomahawk 

must not be forgotten. Soak 
and one-half inches long in 
hot water; when it is pliable, 
split an end down one inch, no 
more (Fig. 178, J), and in true 
Indian fashion bind a stone 
hatchet (Fig. 178, K) between 
the split sides of the stick 
handle with thongs of hide. 
Whittle the little hatchet from 
a piece of wood, cover it with 
glue, then with sand. When 
dry it will be difficult for 
others to believe that the im- 
plement is not of real stone. 
Instead of thongs use thread 
(Fig. 179). 



a stick two 



Fig. 178. — Handle 
and hatchet for tom- 
ahawk. 




Fig. 179. — Toma- 
hawk ready for use. 



The Chieftain's Shield 

is of hide taken from the neck 
of the bull bison ; the piece must be twice the required 
size for a finished shield to allow for the necessary shrink- 
age. Over a fire built in a hole in the ground the skin is 
stretched and pegged down. When heated, it is covered 
with a strong glue made from the hoofs and joints of the 
bison, which causes the hide to contract and thicken. As 
this process goes on the pegs are loosened and again ad- 



Ail Indian Rncampment 



121 



justed until the skin ceases to contract and absorb the glue. 
Then the hide is much smaller and thicker than at first. 
When it has slowly cooled, the skin is cut into a circle and 




Fig. 1 80. — Diagram 
for shield. 



decorated. Though pliable, the shield is strong enough to 

ward off blows from arrows or spears. 
Bison hide is something you 

cannot obtain, so take writing 
paper for the shield. 
Cut it into a circle an 
inch and a half in di- 
ameter, with an exten- 
sion for the handle 
(Fig. 180). Glue the 
free end of the handle 
on the opposite side 
of the back of the 
shield. Make ten pa- 
per eagle feathers 
(Fig. 181), hang seven 
on the bottom of the 
Fig.181. shield with red 

Eagle feather 

of paper. thread, after first Fig. 183.— Decorated Indian shield. 




1 22 Handicraft for Girls 

decorating the centre of the shield with given designs and 
the edge with colored bands, using any or all of the follow- 
ing colors, but no others: positive red, blue for the sky, 
green for the grass, yellow for the sun, white for the 
clouds and snow, and black. To the Indian color is a part 
of religion. Purple, pinks, and some other colors, the red 
man, loyal to his beliefs, can never bring himself to use. 
Attach two of the remaining feathers at the top and another 
on the centre of the shield, as shown in Fig. 182. 
The Indian makes his 

Arrow-heads 

of triangular flakes of flint chipped from a stone held be- 
tween his knees and struck with a rude stone hammer. 
The pieces knocked off are carefully examined, and only 
those without flaws are kept. Stones for arrow-heads must 
be very hard. When found, the red men bury them in wet 
ground and build fires over them, causing the stones to 
show all cracks and checks. This enables the 
arrow-maker to discard those unfitted for his 
work. 

Though you cannot make a real flint arrow- 
head, you can manufacture a toy one. Take 
a piece of stiff pasteboard and cut it like Fig. 
183. Let the length be a trifle over half an 
Fig. 183.— Paper inch. Covcr the arrow-head all over with a 
light coat of glue, then dip it in sand, and the 
arrow-head will come out as if made of stone. Were it 
actually hard stone and large size you would be obliged, 
as the Indians do, to trim and shape more perfectly the 
point and edges of the arrow-head. You would hold a pad 
of buckskin in your left hand to protect it from the sharp 
flint, and on your right hand would be a piece of dressed 




An Indian Encamp^nent 



123 



hide to guard it from the straight piece of bone, pointed 
on the end, which you would use to strike off little bits of 
stone along both edges, working cautiously 
as you neared the point in or- 
der not to break it. But such 
work will not be needed on 
your arrow-head. 
For 

The Shaft 





Fig. 184. — Insert ar 
row-head in shaft. 



Fig. 185. — Arrow- 
head and shaft 
bound together. 



hunt up a piece of wood strong 
and straight. Cut it three in- 
ches in length, remove the bark 
and scrape the wood until it is 
about the thickness of an ordi- 
nary match. Notch one end and 
split the other end down one- 
quarter of an inch, insert the 
arrow-head (Fig. 184), then bind 
the shaft and head together with thread (Fig. 185), in place 
of the wet sinew an Indian would use for a real arrow, after 

he had first fastened the head in the shaft with 

glue from buffalo hoofs. 

Cut three paper feather strips (Fig. 186), 

each an inch in length, 

paint black bands on 

them, bend atdotted line 

and glue the feathers on 



V\ 



r^ 



Fig. 186.— Paper 
leather for arrow. 



the shaft one-quarter of 
an inch from the notch, 
allowing them to stand 
out at angles equally 
distant from each other 
(Fig. 187). Bind the 




Fig. 187. 



124 



Handicraft for Girls 



extensions L and M (Fig. i86) to the shaft, and tie tufts of 
white and red worsted on immediately above the feathers 
to help in finding the arrow (Fig. i88). Paint the shaft in 
brilliant colors. 

Almost any kind of wood that has a spring will make 




A Good Bow 

for your little Indian. Cut the piece 

of wood four inches long and an 

eighth of an inch wide. Scrape it flat 

on one side and slightly rounded on 
yv the other, notch the stick 

l^ at each end, wind the cen- 

tre with red worsted and 
paint the bow in bright 
hues (Fig. 189). Tie a 
strong thread in one notch 
and bring it across to the 
other notch ; tighten until 
it bends the bow centre 
half an inch from the 
straight thread ; tie the 
thread around the notch 
(Fig. 190). Now try the 
wee weapon ; hold it verti- 
cally and shoot the little 
arrow into the air. It will 
fly very swiftly away, land- 
ing many yards from where 
you stand. 

Make the bow case 

(Fig. 192) of ordinary wrapping paper cut like Fig. 191, 

three and a half inches long and two and a half inches wide. 



Fig. 189.— Bow 
ready for string. 



Fig. 190. 
Bow string. 



An Indian Encampment 



125 




Fig. 192. — Bow case 
finished. 




Fold the paper lengthwise through the centre and glue 
the sides together along the dotted lines ; then fringe the 
edge up to the dotted line and decorate with gay paint. 
Dress the joint- 
ed doll squaw in a 
fringed 

Chamois-Skin 
Gown ; 

fold the skin and 
let one half form 
the front, the other 
half the back. Cut 
the garment like 
the half N, in Fig. 
193, stitch the sides 

together, stitch the Fig. 191.— Cut bow case Uke this. 

under part of the sleeves together and fringe both sleeves 

and bottom of the dress (O, Fig. 193). Belt the gown in 

with scarlet worsted and 

load the squaw down with 

strands of colored beads ; 

then seat her on the grass 

(Fig. 194) while you make 

the primitive loom for her 

to use in weaving one of 

the famous 

Navajo Blankets. 

Paint a two by four inch 
piece of white cotton cloth 
with a blanket design in 
red and black, with white 







Kg. 193- — Squaw's chamois dress. 



126 



Handicraft for Girls 



between the markings, and pin it securely on a board 
(Fig. 195). Tie stones to a pole six inches in length 
(Fig. 196); with long stitches fasten the stone-weighted 




Fig- 194- — Squaw doll make-believe weaving Navajo blanket on primitive loom. 

pole to the bottom edge of the painted cloth blanket 
(Fig. 197). 

Two inches above the blanket attach a six-inch pole to 
the board with pins and use a coarse needle and heavy 
thread to make the warp. Run the thread through the 



An Indian Encampment 



127 



wrong side of the blanket 
and up around the pole. 
Cross it on the under side 
of the long thread (P, Fig. 
197) which extends from 
blanket to pole. 

Carry the thread along 

the pole a short distance, ^'^^- ^"^^--^^^^^^ W^nket pinned on board. 

loop it over (Q, Fig. 197) and bring the thread down through 
the right side of the blanket. Take a long stitch and again 





Z^ 



Fig. ig6. — Stones tied to pole for bottom of loom. 

carry the thread up over the pole. Continue until the warp 
is entirely across the blanket. Pin another pole six and a 




Vig. 197. — ^Building primitive loom. 



128 



Handicraft for Girls 



half inches long, three-quarters of an inch above the top 
pole, and fasten the two poles together by tying loops of 
string across from one to the other (Fig. 198). 

Make the loom frame of two seven-inch poles four and a 
half inches apart and crossed at the top by another seven- 
inch pole, the three firmly tied together and made to stand 
erect on the grass by planting the two upright poles in holes 




, — Primitive loom ready for frame. 

bored through the cloth grass into the board ground. Hang, 

the loom on this frame by winding a narro^y strip of cloth] 

loosely around the top of the frame and top of loom (Fig. I94).i 

Find a stout, short-branched twig for 

The Tree 

(Fig. 199). Sharpen the bottom and drive it into a hole in] 



An Indian Enca7np7nent 



129 



the ground. For the foliage cut a fringe of soft green and 
olive-brown tissue-paper folded lengthwise in strips. Crimp 
the strips with a blade of the scissors, then open out the 
fringe ; gather each one through the centre, give the paper 




Fig. igg. — Natural twig and tissue-paper tree. 



la twist, and the two ends will form bunches of foliage. 
iWork the twisted centre of one piece down into a ci'ack at 
the top of the tree. Over across this at right angles in 
lanother opening, fit in the second twist of paper foliage and 



I30 



Handicraft for Girls 



crown all with a bunch standing upright as shown at] 
Fig. 199. 
A solemn 

Little Papoose 

bound in its stiff cradle is one of the drollest things imagin- 
able. Paint a small doll copper color, make its hair black,] 
and bind the baby in a cradle cut from brown pasteboard 
(Fig. 200). Cut along heavy line and bend forward the 




1 



Fig. 2CX3. — The little papoose 
you can make. 



Cradle for papoose. 



tongue R along the dotted line, bring the strap S across 
and glue the end on the under side of the cradle ; then line 
the cradle with white tissue-paper and place the Indian child 
on it; spread a piece of vivid red tissue-paper over the in 
fant, bringing the sides of the cover on the under side of the 
cradle, where you must glue them. Fold over the lower 
end of the paper and glue that also on the back of the cradle. 
Paint the cradle and portions of the cover white, green, 
black, and yellow (Fig. 200) ; then hang the cradle and baby 



An Indian E^icampnient 



131 



on the limb of the tree (Fig. 199), where the little papoose 
will be safe while his squaw-mother works at her weaving. 
The red men use queer money which they call 

Wampum. 

It is made of shells found usually along the borders of 
rivers and lakes. The Indians cut the thick part of the 
shell into C3dinders about an inch long, bore holes length- 
wise through the centres and string them like 
^ beads on fine, strong sinews (Fig. 201), but this 

money is not as pretty as glass beads, for it 
resembles pieces of common clay pipe stems. 
A certain number of hand-breadths of wampum 
will buy a gun, a skin, a robe, or a horse, and 
when presented by one chief to another the 
wampum means good-will and peace. Of course, 
you will want to supply your Indians 
with their own kind of money. You 
can string the wampum into a neck- 
lace and decorate the strand with 
eagle claws, bright beads, and tufts 
of gay worsted. 

Find some beads much smaller, but 
as near as possible in color and form 
to real wampum, and string them with 
tiny eagle claws made of wood cut 
! like Fig. 202, only smaller. Paint the claws very dark 
\ gray, almost black, and bore a hole through the heavy end 
i with a hat-pin heated red hot. The claws will then string 
: easily and give quite a savage appearance to the necklace 
(Fig. 203). 

Let the colored worsted tufts, which must take the 
: place of hair, be bright-red, and the strands of round 



Fig. aoi. 

Wampum, 

I Indian money. 




I':i2 



Handicraft for Girls 



beads on each side of the necklace of various colors 
(Fig. 203). 

Indians when they cannot obtain beads use gayly colored 
porcupine quills for their embroidery. You need not try 
the embroidery, but be sure to make the entire Indian 
encampment with everything pertaining to it. 




Fig. 303. — Indian necklace of wampiun, eagle claws, tufts of hair, and bone beads. 



CHAPTER XIII 

A TOY COLONIAL KITCHEN WITH FAC- 
SIMILE COLONIAL FURNISHINGS. 




OULD it not be 

fun to see a yoke 
of real live oxen 
come slowly walk- 
ing into the kitch- 
en dragging a load of 
logs? That is what 
many of the colonial 
boys and girls saw 
every day, and frequently the boys helped their fathers 
cut the logs which were for the big kitchen fireplace. And 
such a fireplace ! Large enough for the huge, roaring 
fire and the chimney-seats also. These were placed close 
against the sides of the opening, making fine places for the 
boys and girls to sit and listen to thrilling tales of adven- 
ture or delightful fairy stories. 

The kitchen in those days was the chief apartment and 
the most interesting room in the house. Who would want 
to go into the stiff, prim "best room" when they could be 
so much more comfortable in the spacious kitchen where 
everyone was busy and happy, and where apples could be 
hung by a string in front of the fire to roast and made to 
spin cheerily when the string was twisted, that all sides 
might be equally heated ? Any girl or boy to-day would be 

133 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



135 



only too glad of a chance to sit on a log in front of such a 
fire and watch red apples turn and sputter as the heat broke 
the apple skin, setting free the luscious juice to trickle down 
the sides. 

As the Indian's first thought was for shelter, and he put 
up his wigwam, so the early settler's first thought was for 
shelter, and he built, not a wigwam, but a log-house with a 
kitchen large enough to serve as a general utility room. It 

IBoLck. 9/£ inch 




Kitchen Floot* 




Front VX/iincVxes 
Fig. 205. — Kitchen floor. 



was filled with various things, and all articles in it were used 
constantly. Everything not brought from the mother 
country the settlers made by hand. The colonial kitchen 
you can build may be of gray or white cardboard. Old 
boxes, if large enough, will answer the purpose. 

I will tell you exactly how I built the colonial kitchen 
seen in Fig. 204. I made the floor (Fig. 205), the two side 
walls both alike (Fig. 206), the back wall (Fig. 207), and the 
interior of the fireplace (Fig. 208) of light-gray cardboard. 



136 



Hand ia'iift for Girls 



I cut all the heavy 
lines, scored and 
then bent all the 
dotted lines. 

Now you do 
the same thing. 
Get your meas- 
urements correct 
and be careful to 
make the lines 
perfectl3'straight. 
Before putting 
the kitchen to- 
gether, fasten the rustic brackets, cut from a branching 
twig (Fig. 209), on the wall above the mantel-piece to sup- 





Top 






Side WclII^ 






Q 




'BottOTTV 





9 ^ inch 

Fig. 206. — Side wall. 





A 






B 








• • 






• • 








A 






5 














• • 










r*. 








=a 




A 


Ci' 


(c/^mcM 






5" 


M 














s- 


" ^ 










C 








^ 


1 


B 




D 






Q 

1 






J^ IM 


V 










j^ '^ :^' 






^ 














i' i 


• • 




:s 














S 


5 p 


C! 


r 


s^ 


r 








s 



Fig. 207. — Back wall. 



\»Vt.\v 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



137 



port the ilintlock gun. Take two stitches through the 
wall around each twig, as shown in Fig. 210, at the dots 
A and A and B and B (Fig. 207). 







Q 






fc/i ino\i 




q 








ft 





























c 














•»» 














.^ 
















eo 


-. •!■ * 














1 


» ' 

1 
1 
4 




.;i 




1 - 




1 




.^ 




•^ 








CD 


D 




P:io 




« 




D 


/2wcV 


E - 

G 


J 






» 


E 














5 \-rvc.V 


1 
t 







Fig. 208. — Interior of fireplace. 

Every colonial fire{>lace boasted of 

A Strong Crane 

upon which to hang the pots and kettles over the fire. 
One end of the crane was bent down and attached to the 
side chininey wall by iron rings. These rings allowed the 



138 



Handicraft for Girls 





crane to turn so that the extending iron rod could be swung 
forward to receive the hanging cooking utensils and then 
pushed back, carrying the pot and 
kettles over the fire for the con- 
tents to cook. The crane was black 
and of iron. A hair-pin (Fig. 211) 
makes a fine crane. Bend yours, 
as shown in Fig. 212, then with two 
socket-rings made with stitches 
of black darning-cotton fasten the 
crane to the side of the chimney at 
Fig. aog'^-A forked the dots C and C (Fig. 207), and tie Fig.To.-Put 
twig for the a piecc of the darning-cotton on the ti»e brackets 

bracket. i • , , i • t i i i ,^ up in this way. 

little crane immediately below the 
lower socket-ring ; bring the thread diagonally across to 
the top arm of the crane an inch and a quarter from the 

free end and again tie it securely (Fig. 213). 
Bend the two sides of 



The Fireplace 

F and F (Fig. 207) as in Fig. 213. Bend for- 
ward the interior of the fireplace (Fig. 208) at 
dotted lines, and | 

fit Fig. 208 on the 



Fig. 211.— The 
crane is made 
of a hair-pin. 



back of Fig. 207 
to form the inside 
of the fireplace 
and the mantel- 
piece. Slide the 



Fig , 212. — The crane. 



slashed top strips of the sides of the fireplace D,D,D,D 
(Fig. 207), back of the slashed strips D,D,D,D (Fig. 208), 
which will bring the two centres E and E of the sides in 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



139 



Fig-. 208 behind F and F in Fig. 207, and will thus form two 
layers on the sides of the chimney. Push the edge G and 
G of Fig. 208 through the slit G and G in Fig. 207 to form 
the mantel-piece, then bend down the edge of mantel-piece 
along dotted line. 
You must have 

An Oven 

at one side of the great fireplace for baking the wholesome 
" rye and Indian " bread, and the delicious home-made apple, 




Fig. 213. — ^Back wall, showing crane hung and oven door open. 

pumpkin, rice and cranberry pies. In colonial days thirty 
large loaves of bread or forty pies would often be baked at 
one time, so spacious were the ovens. These side-ovens 
used to be heated by roaring wood fires built inside of them 
and kept burning for hours. When the oven was thoroughly 
hot the cinders and ashes were brushed out and in went 
the pies with a lot of little ones called "patties," for the 



140 



Handicraft foi' Girls^ 



children. Whon tliosc wore cooked to a golden brown 
each child was i^iven his own pipino- hot "patty." 

Make your box-like oven accordinj;- to Fig. 214. cut the 
heavy lines, score and bend the dotted lines. Bring the 
side H to the side I ; lap I over 11 so that the two slits. J 
and 1, will exactly tit one over the other; then bend the 
back down and run the tlap J on the back through the two 
slits J on the side, and the tlap K through the slit K. 



^ A- ^\^c\\ 



esj 




\/2.'\VvO\ 



Fig. 314. — The oven. 



Adjust the oven back of the oven door L (Fig. 2o;\ and 
fasten it light on the wall by sliding the tlap M of the oven 
(Fig. 214) through the slit M (Fig. 20;) abm'e the oven 
door; bend it down flat against the wall. Bring the bottom 
oven-flap N in through and over the lower edge of the oven 
door-way N (Fig. 207) and bend that also flat against the 
^vaU (Fig. 213). The two side oven flaps will rest against 
the back of the wall on each side ot the oven door-way. 

Now that is hnished firm and strong, and you can 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



141 



Put the Kitchen Together 

in a few moments. Lay the floor (Fig. 
205) down flat on a table; bend up the 
two diagonal sides O and O, and slide 
the slit P in the side wall (Fig. 206) down 
into the slit P of the floor (Fig. 205), 
bringing the wall (Fig. 206) in front of 
the upturned floor-piece O (Fig. 205). In 
the same way fasten the other side wall 
on the floor. Slip the two slits Q and 
Q of the back wall (Fig. 207) down 
across the top slits (Q, Fig. 206) of the 
side walls. While bringing the back 
wall (Fig. 207) down to the floor, slide 
its outside strips S and S over and 
outside of the upturned pieces of the 
floor, S and S (Fig. 205), to hold them in place. 

As soon as the Indian's wigwam was up, he had a brisk 
fire to cook by, for after shelter came food. The white 
man did likewise after his house was built. Though he 
had andirons to help with his fire, even then to 




Fig. 215. — Pattern for 
andiron. 



Lay the Fire 

in the immense fireplace re- 
quired some skill. Cut two 
andirons of cardboard (Fig. 
215), bend at dotted lines, paint 
black, and the 
andirons will 
stand alone and 
look like real 

Fig. 216,— The andiron. ones (Fig. 2 1 6). 





Fig. 217.— The flames. 



142 



Handicraft for Girls 



Cut from red, orange, yellow, and black tissue-paper 
flames like Fig. 217; bend at dotted line and paste the 




Fig. 218. — The flames leap up the chimney. 

mingled flames one at a time and turned in varying direc- 
tions on a piece of cardboard made to fit the bottom of the 
fireplace. Adjust the little black and- 
irons to the fire and glue them in place ; 
select a large log for the " back-log," 
and a more slender one to lay across the 
front of the andirons. Place smaller 
wood in between with the flames, and 
scatter a few bits of black paper on the 
hearth underneath to appear like fallen 
charred wood. When finished the fire 
should look as if it were actually 
Fig. 219.— Cut the shell sparkling, roaring, and blazing (Fig. 

in half. _, 

218). 

Your fire is ready, so you must hurry and get the 




A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



143 



Great Iron Pot 

to hang over the flames. Break an egg- in halves as indi- 
cated by dotted lines in Fig. 219; even off the edge of the 



Fig. 220. — A strip of paper for the handle. 

larger half shell with a pair of scissors, paste a strip of 
tissue-paper over the edge and glue on a stiff paper handle 
(Fig. 220). Cut three pieces of heavy, stiff paper like Fig. 
221, bend at dotted line and pinch the two lower corners on 
part T together to form the pot legs (Fig. 222). Turn the 



Fig. 221. — Cut the pot 
leg like this. 



Fig. 222. — ^Bend the pot 
leg like this. 



egg-shell upside down and fasten the legs on by gluing the 
flap U (Fig. 221) on the bottom of the shell ; the legs should 
enable the pot to stand upright. Turn 
the egg-shell into iron by painting the 
handle and outside of the pot jet black 
(Fig. 223). Swing the crane forward, 
hang on the pot, pretend you have some- 
thing to cook in it, then move the crane 
back over the fire. 

Remember all the time you are play- 
ing, that this is the way your colonial 
ancestors cooked. 
^. ^ , In days of long: ago, they had many 

Fig. 223.— Paint the pot -^ &.&'./ J 

black. other 




144 



Handicraft for Girls 



Odd Utensils 

One of the easiest for you to make is the long-handled iron 
shovel called a " peel " (Fig. 224), used to place bread and 
pie in the great oven. Cut the peel from stiff cardboard, 
paint it black and stand it up by the side of the chimney 



© 



00 



Fig. 224. — A queer 
shovel called the 
"peel." 




Fig. 225. — Make the toaster by this 
pattern. 



(Fig. 204), Trace the toaster (Fig. 225) on cardboard, paint 
it black, bend up the four semicircular rings and bend 
down the two feet, one on each side (Fig. 226), 

Chicken and other eatables were placed between the 
front and back rings on the toaster and broiled before the 



A Toy Colonial Kitchefi 



145 



fire, which was so hot that it was necessary to have 
long handles on all cooking utensils. 

S Several pieces of iron of varying 

lengths, generally made into the shape 
of the letter S, were called "pot- 
hooks " ; they hung on the 
crane. Make two or three 
Fig. 227.— Make pot-hooks of cardboard 
a pot-hook ^j^^ T)?i\\\\, them black/ 

like this. ^ 

(Fig. 227). When you 
are not using the little toaster, bend 
up the handle and hang it on a pin 
stuck in the wall (Fig. 204). 




Fig. 226. — The toaster. 




Fig. 228. — The spinning-wheel and jointed doll spinning 



146 



Handicraft for Girls 



Just look at your little colonial friend, Thankful 
Parker ! (Fig. 228). The tiny maid seems almost to be 
stepping lightly forward and backward as she spins out long 




Fig. 229. — Spokes. 



threads of the soft, warm 3'^arn, singing softly all the while a 
little old-fashioned song. How busily she works, and listen! 
you can all but hear the wheel's cheery hum, hum, hum! 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



147 




Fig. 233.— 
Wheel 
brace. 



That's the way the real colonial 
dames used to spin. Such a 

Spinning- Wheel 

belonged to every family, for all 
had to do their own spinning or 
go without the yarn, 
as they could ob- 
tain no assistance 
from others. 

Cut from cardboard the 
spokes (Fig. 229) for your 
miniature colonial spin- 
ning-wheel, the tire (Fig. 230), and the 
two small wheels (Fig. 231). Bend 
forward the fan-shaped ends of each 
spoke (Fig. 229) and glue the tire (Fig. 



Fig. 231. — Small 
wheel. 




ec 




CC II 


JJ 
AA 





EE EE 


I 










BB 













-* 


DD DD 






FF FF 






HH 






G Q G 






II 


Fig. 232.— Stand. 




JJ 





148 



Handicraft for Girls 



Fig. 230.— 
Tire of wheel. 



KK 



LL 



^r^ H01.e 



230) around on them; let one edge of tire lie flush 
on the edges of the bent ends of the spokes. 

With the exception of the square spaces AA 
and BB on the stand (Fig, 232) cut the heavy 
lines and the little holes ; score, then bend the 
dotted lines. Bend down the long sides and the 
ends fitting the corners against 
and on the inside of the same 
letters on the sides, glue these 
in place and you have a long, 
narrow box with two extensions 
on one side (HH and GG). 
Bend these extensions, also 
their ends II and J J, and glue 
the ends on the inside of the 
opposite side of the box against 
the places marked II and JJ. 

Turn the box over, bring- 
ing the level smooth side up- 
permost. Cut out the wheel 
brace (Fig. 233), turn it over on 
the other side, then bend AA 
backward and BB forward, 
and glue the brace on the 
box-like stand (Fig. 232) on the 
squares AA and BB. See Fig. 
228. 

Make the upright (Fig. 234) 
of wood ; shave both sides of 
the end, KK, until it is flat and 
thin, then glue a small wheel 
(Fig. 231) on each side, raising 
the wheels above the wood 
that the flat end of the up- Fig. 234.— upright. 



MM 



VioLe. 



« 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



149 



Fig. 235.— Hub. 



I 



right may reach onl}' to their centres. Glue the wheels 
together to within a short distance of their edges. 

With the red-hot end of a hat-pin 
bore tlie hole LL through the front of 
the uprii^ht, and below bore another hole, 
MM, through the side. Make the screw 
(Fig. 238) and the block (Fig. 239) of wood. Run 
the screw through the side hole MM in the up- 
right (Fig. 234), and push the screw on through 
the hole in the top of the block (Fig. 239). Break 
off more than half of a wooden toothpick for the 
spindle (Fig. 236) and pass it through the 
hole LL (Fig. 234). 

Make the hub (Fig. 235) of wood and 

thread it in through the wheel and brace 

(Fig. 233), to hold the wheel in place. Use 

two wooden toothpicks, with the ends 

broken off (Fig. 237), for legs ; insert these 

slantingly into the holes, GG (Fig. 232), 

on the under part of the stand, allowing 

the top ends to reach up and rest against 

the under side of the top of the stand. 

Spread out the bottom ends of the legs. 

Run the upright (Fig. 234) through the single hole near 

one end of the stand (Fig. 232) and pass it down through 

the under hole on HH. The lower part of the upright 

forms the third leg. See that all 
three legs set evenly when 
the wheel stands, and that 
the box part is raised slight- 
ly higher at the upright end, slanting downward 
toward the other end (Fig. 228). Glue the three 
legs firmly in place. 



Fig. 236. — 
spindle. 



Fig. 237.— 
Leg. 



Fig. 238. — Screw. 



a 



Fig. 239.- 
Block. 



^5o 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 240. — Do her hair 
up in this fashion. 



Connect the two small wheels (Fig. 231) 

and the large wheel together by passing a 

string between the small wheels and over 

around the outside of the tire of the 

/large wheel, fastening it on here and 
there with a little glue (Fig. 228). 
^i?'.^'*':~ Twist a piece of raw cotton on the 

Hair-pin. ^ 

spindle and tie a length of white 
darning-cotton to the end of the cotton 
(Fig. 228). 

Stretch the thread across to the hand of 

your colonial-dressed doll, glue it in place, and the next 

time your mother attends a meeting 

of the Society of Colonial Dames tell 

her to show your little 

maid Thankful Parker 

and her spinning-wheel. 

When you 

Dress the Doll 

coil her hair up on top 
of her head (Fig. 240) and fasten it in place with common 
pins (Fig. 241). Make the straight bang look as nearly as 

possible as though the hair 

were drawn up into a 
Pompadour such as was 
worn in Colonial times. 

Make the cap (Fig. 243) 
of thin white material cut 
like Fig. 242, and the band 
(Fig. 244) of the same color 
as the dress. Cut the thin 

white kerchief like Fig. Fig. 245.— Pattern of kerchief. 




Fig. 242. — Pattern of cap. 



Fig. 243. — The cap. 



Fig. 244. — Cap band. 




A Toy Colonial. Kitchen 



151 



245, and fold it as in Fig. 246. Fig-. 247 
gives the design for the dress waist, and 
Fig. 248 the sleeve. The skirt is a straight 
piece gathered into a waist- 
band. The apron (Fig. 249) 
is white. When the doll is 
dressed it should resemble 
little Thankful Parker (Fig. 
228). An 



Back 




D 



Fron-t" 



Fig. 246.— Fold the 
kerchief like this. 



Old-Fashioned Flintlock 
Rifle 



Fig. 247. — Pattern of 
waist. 




with its long, slender barrel was used almost daily by our 

forefathers for securing game as food. 

The gun was kept hanging in plain sight over the 
kitchen mantel- 
piece, ready for de- 
fence at a moment's 
notice, for in those 
early days wolves 
and other wild ani- 
mals were numer- 
ous and dangerous, 
and enemies were 
also likely to appear 
at any time. 

You should have 
one of those queei 
old guns to adorn 
your kitchen wall. 
Get some heavy tin- 
foil off the top of a pig. 251.— Make this part of paste- 

bottle, or take a col- ^°^<*- 



Fig. 248. — Pattern of 
sleeve. 





Fig. 249. — ^The apron. 




Fig. 250. — Lock and 
band of tinfoil. 



k 



152 



Handicraft for Girls 



lapsible tube and from it cut a wide strip like Fig. 250, one 

narrow, straight strip and two medium-wide straight strips, 

four in all. Cut the butt end of 

the gun (Fig. 251) of stiff card- (^ =0 

board. Break a piece measuring 

four and one-half inches from a 



Fig. 252. — A pin for a ramrod. 



common coarse steel knitting-needle for your gun-barrel 
and use a slender, round stick, or the small holder of a 

draughtsman's pen, 



cutting it a trifle 
more than three and 
one-half inches in 
length for the ramrod 
pfroove. 




Fig. 253. — Slide the paper end in the wood like this. 



In the centre of one end of the stick bore a deep hole 
with the red-hot point of a hat-pin and insert the pointed 
end of an ordinary pin for a ramrod (Fig. 252). Split the 
other end of the stick up through the centre not quite half 
an inch and work the butt end of the gun in the opening 
(Fig. 253). 

Lay the gun-barrel above the wooden part (Fig. 254) and 




Fig. 254. — Ready for the tinfoil bands. 



fasten the two together with the four bands of tinfoil 
(Fig. 255), allowing the top part of Fig. 250 to stand up free 
to represent the flintlock. We must be content without 
a trigger unless you can manage to make one by bending 
down and cutting a part (^f Fig. 250. Paint the butt and 
wooden portion of the gun brown before binding on the 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



153 



barrel, and you will find that you have made a very real- 
looking little rifle to hang upon the rustic brackets over 
the mantel-piece. 




Fig. 255.— Colonial flintlock made of knitting-needle and small pen-holder. 



jl When the fire in your big kitchen fireplace needs 

■ brightening, use the 

Little Bellows 

to send fresh air circulating through the smouldering em- 
bers. The bellows are easy to make. Cut two pieces of 
pasteboard like Fig, 256, 
and cut two short strips 
of thin paper. Paste one 
edge of each strip to 
each side of 





Fig. 257. — The finished bellows. 



Fig. 256.— Cut the 
bellows by this 
pattern. 



one piece 
of c a r d - 

board bellows, fold the strips across the cen- 
tre (Fig, 256), and attach the free ends of the 
folded strips to the other piece of pasteboard 
bellows, forming a hinge-like connection on 
each side between the two pasteboard sides. 
Paste the points of the two sides together 
up as far as the dotted line (Fig, 256), When 
thoroughly dry you can work the bellows by 
bringing the handles together and opening 
them as you would real bellows (Fig. 257). 
Heavy tinfoil must furnish material for your 



154 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 258. — Colonial pewter dish made 
of tinfoil. 



Pewter Ware ; 

much of it has the same dull, leaden color and the peculiar 
look of old pewter. Should the pieces of tinfoil you find 

be twisted and uneven, lay them 
on a table and smooth out the 
creases with scissors or the dull 
edge of a knife-blade ; then cut 
out round, flat pieces and holding- 
one at a time in the palm of 
your left hand, round up the 
edges by rolling the ball of a 
hat-pin around and around the plate ; press rather hard and 
soon the edges will begin to crinkle and turn upward (Fig. 
258). You raa}^ mould some deeper than others and have a 
row of different-sized pewter plates on the kitchen manteh 
piece, and you can make a wee pie in the deepest plate, 
open the oven-door and shove the pastry 
into the oven with the little iron peel. 
Try it. 

The colonial kitchen would be incom- 
plete without a bright, 










Home-like Rag Rug 

to place over the bare board floor, and 
it will be fun for you to weave it. Take 
a piece of smooth brown wrapping-paper Fig. 259.— The warp, 
the size you want your mat, fold it cross- 
wise through the centre and cut across the fold (Fig. 259), 
making a fringe of double pieces which we will call the 
warp. Unfold the paper and weave various colored tissue- 
Strips in and out through the brown foundations (Fig. 260), 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



155 



until the paper warp is all filled in with pretty, bright 
colors. You can weave the rug " hit or miss" or in stripes 
wide or narrow as you choose, only make the rugs as pretty 
as possible. 

Now we must manufacture a fine 

Old Colonial Clock 

(Fig. 261). It would never do to forget the clock, for poor 
little Thankful would not know how long her many loaves 
of bread were bak- 
ing in the big oven, 
and the bread 
might burn. Cut 
Fig. 262 of card- 
board and score all 
dotted lines, except 
NN — 00, which 
forms the hinge of 
the door. Mark 
this with a pinhole 
at top and bottom, 
turn the c a r d - 
board over and draw a line from pinhole to pinhole ; then 
score it on this line that the door may open properly out- 
ward. Try to draw the face of the clock correctly. Make 
it in pencil first so that any mistake may be erased and cor- 
rected. When you have the face drawn as it should be, go 
over the pencil lines with pen and ink. Begin the face 
with a circle (Fig. 263). Make it as you made the circle for 
the wigwam, only, of course, very much smaller. Above 
the circle, at the distance of half the diameter of the circle, 
draw a curve with your home-made compass (Fig, 264), 
Lengthen the compass a little and make another curve a 




Fig. 260. — Weave the rug in this way. 



15^ 



Handicraft for Girls 



trifle above the first (Fig. 265). Connect the lower curve 
with the circle by two straight lines (Fig. 266), draw a small 

QQ 




Fig. 261. — Colonial clock with 
movable weights. 



Fig. 262. — ^The clock is cut in one piece. 



circle above the large one (Fig. 267), connect the two cir- 
cles by two scallops (Fig. 268), and bring the upper curve 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



^Sl 



down into a square (Fig. 269). The small top circle stands 
for the moon; draw a simple face on it like Fig. 270, then 
make the numbers on the large circle 
(Fig. 271) and also the hands (Fig. 272). 
Both numbers and hands must be on the 
same circle on the clock. They are on 
two different circles in the diagrams that 
you may see exactly how to draw them. 

Leave Fig. 269 white, but paint the 
other portions of the clock a light reddish 
brown with black lines above and below the door, and a 
black band almost entirely across the bottom edge of the 
front of the clock that the clock may appear to be standing 
on feet. Gild the three points on the top to make them 
look as if made of brass. 

Be sure that the four holes in the top (Fig. 262) are fully 




Fig. 263. — Draw the circle. 






Fig. 264. — Then a curve 
above the circle. 



Fig. 265. — Another curve 
above the first one. 



Fig. 265. — Connect the 
lower curve with the 
circle by two lines. 



large enough to allow a coarse darning-needle to be passed 
readily through them ; then bend the clock into shape, fit- 
ting the extension PP over the extension (^(^ ; the two 
holes in PP must lie exactly over those in Q,Q,. Glue the 



158 



Handicraft for Girls 



clock together, using the blunt end of a lead-pencil, or any 
kind of a stick, to assist in holding the sides and tops to- 
gether until the glue is perfectly dry. 

Thread a piece of heavy black darning-cotton in the larg- 





Fig. 267. — Draw a small 
circle above the large one. 



Fig. 268. — Connect the two 
circles by two scallops. 



Fig. 269. — Extend line of upper 
circle down to form a square. 



est-sized long darning-needle you can find; on one end of 
the thread mould a cylinder-shaped piece of beeswax, cover 
it with thin tinfoil, then open the clock-door and hold the 




Fig. 270. — Make this face 
in the small circle. 




Fig. 271. — Put the num- 
bers on the clock face 
in this way. 




Fig. 272. — Make the 
hands of the clock 
like these. 



clock with its head bent outward and downward from you. 
Look through the open door and see the holes on the inside 
of the top; run 3'our needle through one of these holes and 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen 



159 



across the top on the outside, 
bringing it down through the 
other hole into the clock. Slip 
the needle off the thread and 
mould another piece of bees- 
wax on the free end of the 
thread, make it the same size 
and shape as the first weight, 
cover this also with tinfoil an^ 
you will have clock-weights 

(Fig. 273) for wind- 
ing up the old-fash- 

ioned timepiece. 

Gently pull down 

one weight and the 

other will go up, 

just as your colonial 

forefathers wound 

their clocks. When 

the weight is pulled 

down in the real 

clock it winds up 

the machinery, and 

the clock continues 

its tick, tack, tick, 

like the ancient timepiece Longfellow 

tells us of, stationed in the hall of 

the old-fashioned country-seat. 
Do you like real country buttermilk, and have you ever 
helped churn ? If you live in the city or for some other 
reason are not able to make the butter, you can still enjoy 
manufacturing a little 




Fig- 273.— Weights for winding 
the clock. 





Fig- 275. — The churn. 



Fig. 274. — Pattern of the churn. 



i6o 



Handicraft for Girls 



Colonial Churn 

that will look capable of producing the best sweet country 

butter (Fig. 275). 

Cut Fig. 274 of heavy paper or light-weight cardboard ; 
mark three bands on it (Fig. 275). 
Make your churn much larger than 
pattern, have it deep enough to stand 

Fig. 276.— Cork lid g \v\^]\ as Fip;. 27;. Glue the sides 

to the churn. ° , , n , . 

together along the dotted lines, turn 
up the circular bottom and glue the extensions up 
around the bottom of the churn. Fit a cork in the 







Fig. 278.— 
Dasher. 



Fig. 279. — Push the end 
of the handle through 
the dasher. 



Fig. a8o. — Cut 
end of handle 
pasted on the 
dasher. 



Fig. 277.— 
Handle of 
the dasher. 



top for the churn-lid and make a hole through the centre of 
the cork for the handle of the dasher (Fig. 276). Make the 
handle by rolling up a strip of paper as you would roll a 
paper lighter. Glue the loose top end of the handle on its 
roll ; then cut the large end of the handle up a short dis- 
tance through its centre (Fig. 277). Cut the dasher (Fig. 
278) from cardboard, slide it over 
the divided end of handle (Fig. 279), 
bend the two halves of the handle- 
end in opposite directions, and glue 
them on the dasher as shown in 
Fig. 280. Slip the handle of dasher 
, , ,. , , throu2:h the cork lid (Fig. 281), and 

Fig. 281. — Put the handle of the ^ . _ \ & y 

dasher through the lid. fit the lid in the churn (Fig. 275). 




» 



A Toy Colonial Kitchen i6i 

Paint the churn and handle of dasher a light-yellow-brown 
wood color, the bands black, and when dry you can work 
the dasher up and down the same as if the churn were a 
real one. Stand the churn in )^our kitchen not far from the 
fire so that little Thankful may attend to the cooking while 
she is churning. 



cMi.\rri:R xiv 




LITTLE PAPER HOUSES OF JAPAN 

IvAcJ ILl'. quaint aiul lull ol siinshino 
.^J ->^ .iiul color art^ tlio typical housi^s 

ot japan. l'\\c\ avc so sinipU^ 
in oonstrni'tion a oliiKl tni^ht 
almost build tlunn, oontMallv 
only one stm-y in luMi;ht and 
always without a cellar, chini- 
noys. tnc[Waccs. windows, and 
even without a doof. Yet the dainty abiules ate Hooded 
with lii^ht and Iresh air. How is it managed? Simply by 
sliding the entire Iront ot the house to one side, leavinj;- 
the buildiui;- wide open. Otten the back walls, too, are 
0[">ened. and in some houses tlu^ sides also. These cott-ages 
are usually part wood and part paper. It seems strange 
to think of people actualh' Hying in paptM- dwellings, but 
the Japanese understand how to manutacture strong, 
durable paper. They delight in making all sorts ot i^ajHM-. 
Irom the tough, well-nigh indestiuctible kind to the deli- 
cate, tilniv variety, and it is adapted to inmunerable uses. 
In Japan people iuit only build paper walls, but the yery 
poor \year paper clothing. 
We will make our 

Japanese House 

entirely ot pajHM" (Fig\ 282). Take medium-weight water- 
color j">aper, or any kind that is stit1 enough and not too 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 



163 



brittle, cut a piece sixteen inclies loii^- and seventeen inches 
wide and (mi it mark the plan of the lar^e room (Fig. 283). 
This should measure sixteen inches across the back from 
A to A, seventeen inches along the side from A to B, and 
thirteen inches across the fnmt from B X.o C. The back 
division forms the foliage and the back of the room, the 







mmmmmmmm*.:^^-^^- 



UTiT^T^^TnT'^ tR Mi la ^ ^ a ii ■■ la ii ^ ^ m 1 m 




Fig. 282. — The little paper house. 



centre division the roof, and the front division the front and 
sides of the room. 

No paste is used in making the ?juilding ; the design is 
merely cut out, bent into shape, and fastened together with 
projecting tongues run through slits. Cut all the heavy 
lines, lightly score, then bend all the dotted lines, except 
the two immediately across the front of the room at top and 
bottom. This front is five inches wide and four and a half 
inches high, with two openings in it and a portion extending 
down in front to form the little pf^rch. Make a pinhole at each 



164 



Handicraft for Girls 



end of the two lines forming top and bottom of the front of 
the room A and B, then turn the paper over and draw a top 

A. 2/^ inches 3)^ irvcKcs .I,ia. 5 irvcKes 4 irvcKcs A 




5 irvcKes 

Fig. 283. — Plan of large room. 



line and a bottom line across on the wrong side of the paper 
from pin-point to pin-point. Score these on the wrong side 
of the paper, for thej must bend from that side in order to 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 



165 



m 




5 


iivcKes 






X. 


(J 










C 








c 










CM 


to 








3/4 








3/4^ 


mcK 








ii\cK 



Fig. 284. — Floor of large room. 



cxlend inward from the right side to form the projection 
of the roof and the top landing of the veranda. Fasten the 
room together, then cut out the floor (Fig. 284), slide it in 
place and also the steps TFig. 285), marking straight lines 
across the dia- 
gram to indi- 
cate steps. 

Build the 
small room(Fig. 
286) in the same 
way that you 
made the large 
one. Cut it 
from a piece of 
paper nine and one-half inches wide and thirteen and one- 
half inches long. This room has no floor. When finished 
run the tongues extending out on the back of the room 
through the remaining four slits at the side of the foliage 

on the back of the large room (Fig. 
283). Work carefully and you will 
be fully repaid. 

Paint the roof of each room in 
little black squares with white mark- 
ings between to represent black til- 
ing. Paint the outside of the house 
yellow, the back wall of the large 
room pale blue, the floor light brown. Paint the back of 
the small room mottled green and pink. Make a band of 
light blue edged with black across the outside top of the 
front opening and a red band across the bottom. Let the 
projecting veranda be yellow, with vines across the lower 
part. Edge the openings of the large room with two nar- 
row bands, one purple the other black, and mark black lines 



^« Lap 



? inches 
Fig. 285.— The steps. 




1 66 



Handicraft for Girls 



from side to side crossed with lines running from top to 
bottom to form a lattice-like work on the side of the smaller 
opening (Fig. 282), 

4/2 irvcKes 



4^ 



o 

(A 



5!^ ir\cKes \ 

*l 




3/2 iacKes 

Fig. 286. — ^Plan of small room. 

The sides of the house are supposed to be formed of 
paper-covered screens which slide in grooves and may be 



I 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 167 

removed entirely when desired. The interior of a real Jap- 
anese house is divided into rooms merely by the use of 
sliding paper screens, and the entire floor may readily be 
thrown into one large apartment, there being no solid par- 
titions as in our houses. Cut out flat round paper lanterns, 
paint them with the gayest of colors and make the small top 
and bottom bands black ; then with needle and thread fasten 
the lanterns along the top front of the large opening of the 
small room (Fig. 282). 

You need not be concerned in the least about furnishing 
the little house : it does not need any furniture, for the Jap- 
anese have no stoves, chairs, tables, knives or forks, carpets, 
bedsteads, washstands, bookcases, desks, framed pictures, 
nor any comforts like ours. 

The Floors 

are covered with clean, thick, soft matting rugs and are just 
the place for girls and boys to play, and have a good time 
running about in their stocking feet, for in Japan people 
always take off their shoes before entering a house and 
everyone goes either stocking-footed or barefooted when 
indoors, so the floor-mats are kept free from dust. 

Of course, men, women, and children all sit on the floor; 
and when 

Breakfast is Ready 

the floor is set instead of a table, and each person receives 
his own little lacquer tray placed on the floor, or on a low 
wooden stool, with the individual portion of rice in a deli- 
cate china bowl, pale tea in dainty teacups and shredded 
or diced raw fish in china a queen might envy. On the 
tray are also a pair of ivory chopsticks, which even a little 
child can manage skilfull}^ in place of the spoon, knife, or 



1 68 Handicnift foy Girls 

fork that our girJs or boys would use. The Japanese do not 
have bread, butter, milk, or coffee, and never anv meat, but 
they cultivate a mammoth radish which is cut up, pickled 
and eaten with relish. For dinner they take pale tea, rice, 
and fish, and for supper fish, pale tea, and rice. Often the 
fish is cooked, sweetmeats are served and pickled radish 
also, but frequentl}'^ the breakfast consists of merel}' a bowl 
of cold rice. These unique people do not seem to think or 
care much about their food : many times they denv them- 
selves a meal that they may spend the money on a feast of 
flowers in some garden where thev can enjov gazing upon 
masses of exquisite cherrv blossoms, chrvsanthemums, or 
other flowers. No nation in the world loves flowers more 
than the Japanese, and none can lival them in the beautiful 
arrangement of their blossoms. 
When night comes the natives 

Never Go to Bed, 

for there are no beds. Soft silk or cotton comforts are 
brought to each person, and the people roll themselves up 
in the comforts and sleep an}' place they wish on the floor, 
using little wooden or lacquer benches for pillows ; usually 
these have a roll of soft paper on the top, making them a 
little more comfortable. Take a comfort and try sleeping 
on the floor with some books under your head and j^ou will 
know how it feels to sleep in Japanese style. 
Every Japanese house should have its 

Fenced-in Garden. 

Make vour fence of paper cut according to Fig. 287, and 
mark the pattern (Fig. 288) on it with two tones of yellow 
paint. Paint the convex top of the gate-way a bright red 
with narrow bbck border, and mark the white gate-posts 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 



169 



with black Japanese lettering like Fig. 289. Paint the re- 
maining portions of the gate-way yellow, the edges black. 
Fig. 282 will help you to grasp the idea of the fence and 
gate-way. The names of the streets are not on the corners 



a 




3% irvcKcs 3/^ incKes 3 iacKcs 3/i it\cKes 

Fig. 287. — Fence and gate way. 



%. 



% 



as in our cities, so a panel of white wood is nailed to the 
gate-posts with both the name of the street and householder 
on it, and often a charm sign is added. 

Put up the fence by slipping the upper tongues on each 
end through the slit on the outside front edge of each room, 

then sliding the lower 

tongues of the fence 

through the lower out- 
side edges of rooms 

and porches (Fig. 282). 
Both boys and girls 

have fine times in 

Japan, and they are as 

happy as the day is 

long. On the fifth day 

of the fifth month the 
boys reign supreme, and their relatives and friends vie with 
each other in their endeavors to render the day a happy one 
for the little fellows. All Japan is alive and anxious to 
celebrate the occasion. Quaint flags in the shape of enor- 



3 

Li) 



6 



Fig. 288. — Draw this pattern 
on the fence. 



Fig. 289. — Signs for gate- 
posts. 



I JO 



Handicraft for Girls 



mous fish swim in the air and float over 
the towns, forming bright masses of color. 
Every home that is blessed with one or 
more boys displays a fish banner for each 
son, the younger the child the larger the 
fish, and the proudest house is the one that 
can boast of the greatest number of fish 
flying from its bamboo pole. Every Japan- 
ese boy's birthday is celebrated on this da}' 
with great rejoicing, no matter at what time 
of the year he was born. 
Make 

Several Fish 

for the pole to be 
placed in front of the 
little paper house; 
they look very comi- 
cal, bobbing and swing- 
ing high in air with their wide-open 
mouths. Cut Fig. 290 of white tissue- 
paper, also Fig. 291, which is a trifle 
larger than the first and is slashed along 
three edges. Lay Fig. 290 on top of 
Fig. 291 ; bend the flaps over and paste 
them on Fig. 290. Form a little hoop 
of a strip of stiff paper with the ends 
pasted together; blow the fish open, 
then paste the hoop on the inside of 
the open edge of the head to form its 
immense mouth. When dry mark the 
fish with red paint like Fig. 292. Tie a thread on the two 
opposite sides of the mouth and with another thread attach 




Fig. 290. — Upper half 
of koi. 




Fig. 291. — Under half of koi. 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 



171 



the loop to a slender stick on the 
end of which you have fastened a 
gold disk made of two pieces of gilt 
paper. This is intended to repre- 
sent the rice ball with which the real 
fish are fed. The fish 
banners are hollow so 
that the wind may fill 
them, causing the fish 
to rise and fall as 
the breeze comes and 
goes. Push the end 
of your fish-pole 
through the centre of 
a small box-lid or but- 
ton mould (Fig. 293) 
and stand the dec- 
oration outside the 
gate-way of the little 
house. The fish used 
on this eventful day 
are the famous carp, 
which the natives call 
koi, the unconquer- 
able. The Japanese 
carp stands for good 
cheer, indomitable 
will, perseverance 
and fortitude, and it 
is used to impress 
these virtues upon 

Fig. 292 -The koi- ^J^g ^Q ^^,^ ^^ ^J^g 

emblem or undaunted ■' 





determination. 



good qualities named Y\%. 293.— Boy's birthday pole. 



172 



Handicraft for Girls 



are fully as necessary for girls even though the Japanese 
do not mention the fact, but girls are not forgotten. The 
nation gives them the third day of the third month for their 
festival. It is called the 

"Feast of Dolls," 

and is a gala day for little girls. Dolls and gorgeously 
dressed images, representing the Mikado, nobles, and ladies, 
are brought out and placed on exhibition, along with beau- 
tiful jars containing queer little trees and rare vases tilled 
with flowers. The day is made a joyous one and a day 
long to be remembered by the little girls. 

There are no sidewalks in Japan, the pavements being 
laid lengthwise through the centre of the streets, and on 
this path people stroll or hurry along. Mingled with the 

others are the Japanese laboring men, called 

coolies, carrying between them 




The Kago, 

which swings from a pole the ends of which 
rest on the men's shoulders. The kago is a sort 
of canopied hammock chair. You can easily 
fashion a tiny one from paper and straw. Cut 
Fig. 294 of stiff paper, make it three inches 
long and at the broadest part an inch and a 
quarter wide. Paint the kago yellow, and to 
form the framework sew on each end a piece 
of heavy broom straw, jointed grass, or straw 
which has been limbered by soaking, and cut a piece six 
and three-quarter inches long for each side. Bring the 
side straws together beyond each end and bind them (Fig. 
295). Then hunt up a slender round stick six inches long 
and sew the kago on it by means of thread loops at each end 



Fig. 294. 
Pattern of kago 



Little Paper Houses of yapan 173 

(Fig. 296). Make the canopy of a piece of stiff paper three 
and one-half inches long and two and one-quarter inches 
wide, paint it yellow, and with stitches only at each end sew 




Fig- 295. — Bind the edges of the kago with grass or straw like this to make the frame. 

it firmly on the pole over the seat of the kago (Fig. 297). 
Either buy a little 

Japanese Umbrella 

or make one of a disk of green tissue-paper folded and 
crimped from centre to edge. Use a heavy broom straw 




Fig. 296. — Tie the kago to the pole. 

for the handle and lighter ones for the ribs; stick them in, 
gluing them only to the centre, which is now the top of the 
umbrella; wind the top of the umbrella, the ribs, and the 
handle firmly together with black thread. The umbrella 
will not open but looks well closed. Place a tied bundle of 
red tissue-paper and the green umbrella on top of the yellow 



174 



Handicraft for Girls 



kago and fasten them securely in place with black thread (Fig-. 
298). Fold a piece of soft, lavender-colored material on the 
seat of the kago as a comfort for the doll to sit on ; then fit in 




Fig. 297. — Sew the 
top on over the pole. 



a little Japanese doll or any kind of doll dressed and painted 
to resemble a little Jap. The doll's head should reach up, or 
almost up, to the canopy. Pull part of the comfort over the 




T\%. 298.— The little 
lady rides in her kago. 



doll and fasten her snugly up in a sitting position. Make 
a gay paper fan and attach it to one of the doll's hands, and 
the little lady will be ready to go on her journey. 




CHAPTER XV 

SOME ODD THINGS IN RUSSIA 

'N his own country the Czar is almost wor- 
shipped by the people, and when his 
coronation takes place, crowds of loyal 
Russians flock to Moscow, the former 
in hopes of obtaining a glimpse of their 
beloved ruler, or at least of seeing portions of the grand 
procession, the beautiful decorations and the gay festivities 
which always form part of the jubilant occasion. 

For centuries the great white Czars have been crowned 
in the 

Cathedral of the Assumption, 

which, though not large, is magnificent, and is the most im- 
portant building in all Russia. The structure stands, sur- 
rounded by many other sacred edifices, in an enclosure 
known as the Kremlin, situated in the centre of the city of 
Moscow. Its white walls support a vaulted roof of soft, 
dull green crowned with golden cupolas, each cupola sur- 
mounted by a shining golden cross. The interior is re- 
splendent almost beyond description with its rich coloring, 
its jewel-framed paintings, its sculptures, its gold, silver, and 
precious stones, its priceless robes and holy relics. 

To give a true conception of the wonderful interior of 
the sacred cathedral to one who has never seen it, is impos- 
sible, but we can gain an idea of the general appearance of 
the exterior by making a miniature Cathedral of the As- 

175 



176 



Handicraft for Girls 



sumption (Fig. 299). Find, or make, a firm white pasteboard 
box seven inches long, five and one-quarter inches wide, and 
four and one-half inches high ; this is for the body of the 
building. Fold a strip of paper seven inches in length, 
crosswise, through the centre, and bring the ends together, 




Fig. 299. — Miniature Cathedral of the Assumption. 



making another fold crosswise through the centre of the 
doubled strip, which will give four layers of paper of equal 
length. Cut this into a scallop three-quarters of an inch 
deep, open out the strip and you will have four scallops, 
each one and three-quarters inch wide, at its base. Lay the 
strip in turn along each of the top edges of the sides of the 
box, and mark the box around the edges of the scallops, 
drawing four scallops on the two long sides of the box, and 



Some Odd Tlmtgs m Russia 



177 




three on each of the short sides. 
Cut out the scallops on top of 
the box; then take the cover of 
the box, which must form the 
roof of the structure, and remove 
the bent-down sides; trim off 
with scissors the extreme edge 
of one long- side and one short 
side, until the cover forms a tight fit in the 
top of the box, but may, with gentle pressure, 
be made to slide down one inch. Fasten 
the roof in place at each corner by running 
a strong pin from the outside 
wall through into the roof, until the pin is em- 
bedded its full length in the roof. 
Now cut the 




Fig. 300. — The Door 
way. 



u 



Door-way 

300) of light reddish-brown 



Fig. 302. — Door 

window. 



Fig. 303. — Upper 
window. 



(Fi 

paper; make it three inches high 

and one and one-half inch wide. 

Let the door proper (Fig. 301) be of 
inked paper an inch and a half high by an inch and a quarter 
wide, the door-window (Fig. 302) one inch and a quarter high 
by three-quarters of an inch 
wide. Cut the upper row of 
windows like Fig. 303 and 
the lower front windows ac- 
cording to Fig. 304. Make the 
lower side windows double 
(Fig. 305). The door-arch 
(Fig. 306) must be a trifle 

Fig. 304. — Lower front , i . 

windows. ovcr two and one-quarter 





Fig. 305. — Lower 
side windows. 



178 



Handicraft for Girls 



T-i-rrrn-TT-r 



Fig. 306. — The door-arch. 



inches long. Curve the 
arch by drawing it across 
a blade of the scissors, 
paint it green on both 
sides, bend down the slash- 
ed portion, and paste the 



arch over the door-way, as in Fig. 299. 
Make five 

Cupolas 

of white writing-paper. For each cupola, cut a piece of paper 
five inches long. Let the first be three inches wide and the 
remaining four two and one-quarter inches wide; slash up 
the bottom edge of each cupola one-quarter of an inch ; 
then half an inch below the top edge of 
each cupola paste a row of narrow, three- 
quarter-inch high windows cut from 
p_ inked paper (Fig. 303). 

I I When the windows are 

1 ' ' I on, paste the two ends 

of each cupola together, 

lapping them one-quarter 

of an inch. Bend out the 

lower slashed edge and 

glue the highest cupola on 

top of the centre of the 

roof; fasten the other four 

on the roof near the cor- 
ners and at equal distances 

from the centre (Fig. 299). 

Have ready five half egg- 
shells and glue one on the 

top of each cupola. Then 







Fig. 307. — ^The paper 
cross. 




308. — A cross on the 



cut five paper crosses(Fig. top of each cupola. 



Some Odd Things in Russia 



179 



Fig. 309. — A narrow black strip. 



307), each measuring about two inches in height, including 
the lower slashed portion. Fasten a cross on top of each 
egg-shell (Fig. 308). Gild all 
the crosses and shells, bringing MiPPIWPVM'WPPi'PPPf 

the gilt down into a narrow 
band on the paper below the 
shells. On the edge of each shell paste a narrow black- 
painted paper strip (Fig. 309), adjusting it so that the gilt 
on the white paper will show below the points. 

To Make the Roof 

fasten a five-eighths-inch Avide strip of paper along and over 
the scalloped top edge of the four sides of the building, 
using strong paste or glue for the purpose (Fig. 310); be 
sure that the strip is on even and firm ; then let it dry. 

Paint the entire flat 
roof and flat top sur- 
face of the scallops 
green, using the 
same paint selected 
for the door-arch. 
Oil paint is best. Be 
carefulnotto spatter 
green on the white 
and gold cupolas. 
When finished, 
place your little cathedral up high on a level with your eyes, 
turn it until you have the view which is given in Fig. 299, 
and you can ver) easily imagine just how the real Cathedral 
of the Assumption appears. 

Thousands of girls, boys, and grown-up men and women 
in freezing, snowy Russia, 




Fig. 310. — Fasten a strip of paper along the edge. 



k 



i8o 



Hatidkraft Jor G/Ws 



Sleep On Their Stoves 

every night during the long winter months. How strange 
it would seem to be away up on top of a great warm stove, 
built of brick and nearly as high as the 
ceiling! The Russians do not bother 
about making the bed, or rather the 
stoye, for they have no sheets, blankets, 
or bedspreads. When it is time to re- 
tire, the inmates climb up on top of the 
great whitewashed stove and sleep just 
as they arc, in the clothing they wear 
during the day. 

If you would know how the average 
Russian looks. 
Dress a Doll Like a 
Russian 



Fig. 311. — Dress a doll like a 
Russian. 





Fig. 3U. — Half of 
cap. 



(Fig. 311). Cut two halves 

of a muslin cap (Fig. 

31J) and sew them to- 
gether (Fig. 313). Sew in strands of tan-colored darning 
cotton on a line around the cap, midway from top and bot- 
tom (A-B, Fig. 312), and also sew a line of tan-colored 
strands on each side of the middle 
stitching of the white cap, until the 
lower fringe is reached. Fig. 314 

shows the fringe 

of hair partially 

sewed on the cap. 

Glue this cap on 

the doll's head, 

smooth down the „. ^^ ^ . , ^ , 

Fig. 314. — The fringe of hair 
Fig. 313.— The cap. luur and CUt it off partially sewed on. 





Some Odd Things in Russia i8i 




straight around, making the hair a trifle shorter at the back 

than the front. 

Cut another piece of cloth (Fig. 315), and sew in a fringe 

of the tan-colored cotton (Fig. 316); glue 

this on the doll to form the beard, and trim ^^\^xX&^^}^ 

off the edges. Paint the moustache on 
the face, making it the 
color of the hair. Rus- 
sians, as a rule, are blonds, 

Fig. 315.— Another piece having either red or ^. , ^ , , 

of cloth. *= , , . ^'2- 316.— The beard. 

lighter-colored hair. 

Make the trousers loose and bind them to the doll below 
the knees. The Russian leather boots which the natives wear 
always reach up over the trousers, and you can make such 
boots by painting the doll's feet black and sewing straight 
pieces of black material on the doll for boot-legs, allowing 
the cloth to be long enough to wrinkle around the ankle. 

Try to make the boots appear as if laced up the front, 
for many wear them so in Russia. The blouse should be 
loose and belted in at the waist, hanging straight and square 
around the bottom. In case your doll has real hair, omit 
the wig and cut the real hair in Russian style. 

These people never use their immense stove for heating 
a teakettle, though they drink tea upon all occasions. To 
make tea they resort to a samovar, which is a curious brass 
or copper vessel, shaped something like an urn. When the 
tea is ready, it is poured into tall glasses, a slice of lemon is 
put in each glass, and the tea drunk scalding hot. The 
beverage is called chai, and the Russians enjoy it so much 
that they often take twenty glasses in succession. When 
one desires sugar, it is not put in the tea, but held in one 
hand, and a portion bitten off from time to time between 
the swallows of tea. 



1 82 



Handicraft for Girls 



If vou will eniptv an egg-shell of 
its contents and get a sheet of white 
writing-paper, a small square box, a 
piece of yellow sealing-wax, some 
liquid gilt, and five gilt beads, four 
about the size of large peas, and the 
fifth a trifie larger, we can manufacture 



^^ A Little Russian Samovar 

f^lr "^^HV ^"^^^^ ^^^^' 3^/^' Should you have no 
^^tv -5*^^^^ '^^^^^' i^i^ke one of pasteboard one inch 
square and half an inch high; if vou 
cannot get the beads, use small, round 
buttons. The four beads or buttons 
are feet for the samovar. Fasten one 
on each corner of the bottom of the 
box with sealing-wax, then glue the 
broken centre of the large end of the 
egg-shell on the middle of the top of 
the box. Cut the handles from paper according to Fig. 318, 
making each handle one inch and a half long and half an inch 
wide. Run the half of one handle over the edge of a blade 
of the scissors; this will cause the paper to curl. Turn the 
handle over and curl the other half in the opposite 
direction ; bend the handle at the dotted line, one- 
quarter of an inch from the lower edge, 
and paste it on one side of the samovar, 
midwav between top and bottom. 
Make the other handle in the same way, 
and fasten it on the opposite side. 

Cut the faucet (Fig. 319) of paper 
one inch wide; roll the paper up from 
the bottom, bringing the handle on top ; 




Fig. 317. — A little Russian 
samovar. 



rig. 318, 

The 
handle. 




Fig. 319.— The 
faucet. 







U' 





o o 
o o 



Fig. 320. — The different parts of the samovar. 

183 



184 Handicraft for Girls 

bend the handle straight up, and bend the spout down in 
front of the handle. Glue the other end of the faucet to the 
front of the samovar with sealing-wax, placing it near the 
bottom, half-way between the two handles. 

Make the top chimney of a roll of paper a generous inch 
in width. Paste the loose edge of the paper down on the 
roll, and pierce a hole in the roll one-quarter inch from the 
bottom, making it large enough to admit the end of a match. 
Glue a burned match in this hole, allowing the main part 
to extend out one-quarter of an inch from the chimney. 
Fasten a small, round, flat button on the end, and attach a 
round paper disk three-quarters of an inch in diameter to 
the top of the chimney, crowning the disk with the large 
bead. 

Fig. 320 gives all the different parts of the samovar and 
shows as nearly as possible how the}^ should be put to- 
gether. When the samovar is finished, gild it all over, and 
you will have a unique little creation that would delight 
the heart of a Russian. 



II 



CHAPTER XVI 



POTTERY WITHOUT A POTTER'S WHEEL 




LMOST every girl at one 
time in her life has loved 
dearly to make mud-pies, 
and it is not strange, 
for her mother, grand- 
mother, and many, many 
times great-great-grand- 
mother before her de- 
lighted in making mud-pies. The last, the primitive women 
of our race, made them to some purpose, for they were the 
inventors of pottery. The home-making, house-keeping 
instinct was strong even in these women, who had no 
houses to keep, and they did their best with the material 
at hand. 

First they wove rude baskets for holding and carrying 
food; then they learned that cooked food was better than 
uncooked and could be preserved much longer, so they 
made baskets of a closer weave and cooked in them by 
means of water heated by hot stones; finally, they tried 
cooking over the fire in shallow baskets lined with clay. 
The clay came out of the basket baked and hard, and behold, 
they had a new kind of vessel — fire-proof and water-proof. 

We may imagine with what joy they welcomed this ad- 
dition to their meagre store of home-making utensils and 
with what patient industry they strove to improve upon 
this discovery. 

185 




Mailing coiled pottery. 



l86 



Pottery IVithout a Potter s Wheel 187 

They used their baskets as moulds to hold the soft clay, 
and they fashioned the clay without moulds into shapes 
suggested by natural objects. The sea-shells furnished in- 
spiration and many vessels were made in their beautiful 
forms. 

The first potter was a woman, even as the first basket- 
maker was a woman, and, coming down to our own times, 
the important discovery of the production of exquisite col- 
ors and blending of colors in the Rookwood pottery was 
made by a woman. 

Discovered, developed, and still, in many cases, carried 
on by women, surely pottery is a woman's art, and as a girl 
inheriting the old instincts, you may find it the simplest 
and most natural means of expressing your individuality 
and love of the beautiful. Beginning as these gentle sav- 
a-ges began, using their primitive method, you may be in- 
spired to study deeper into the art, and perhaps become 
the discoverer of some new process that will give to the 
world a still more beautiful pottery. 

Even the smallest girls may do something in 

Coiled Pottery, 

for it is very simple and easy at first, growing more diffi- 
cult only as one grows ambitious to attempt more intricate 
forms. 

The Clay 

ready for use you will find at any pottery. If it is dry 
break into small pieces, put it in a large stone jar, and cover 
with cold water; let it stand until thoroughly soaked 
through and then stir with a stick until well mixed, and 
work with your hands — squeezing and kneading until free 
from lumps and perfectly smooth. When it is dry enough 



1 88 Handicraft for Girls 

not to be muddy, and is of the consistency of dough, it is in 
good working condition. 

Keep the clay always in the jar and closely covered that 
it may not again become too dry. 

Besides the clay you will need a table to work on, a 
pastry-board, a thin block of wood about twelve inches 
square, a wet sponge for cleaning and moistening your fin- 
gers, and several simple tools. 



The Table. 

If you stand at your work, a tall office stool with rotat- 
ing seat will be just the thing you want, for by turning the 

seat this way and that 

f\ you may look at your 

/ work from all sides 

without disturbing its 
position. An}^ kind of 



Fig. 321. — ^A short, flat stick. 



^-^^io)iiiniiii)iiiiiiiiiiii,Miiihiiiiimiiiiiinn.ii,ini iiiiiiihmniniiimrammwiwSis,,^ Ordinary tablc will an- 

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ swer the purpose, how- 
Fig. 322. — The tools. Piece of round stick sharpened eVCr. Oil tOD of the 

table or stool place 
your pastry-board, and at the right-hand side the sponge, 
which must be kept quite damp. 
You will want but 



Few Tools 

as most of the work is done by the fingers alone. A short, 
flat stick, sharpened on one side like the blade of a knife 
(Fig. 321), an old penknife, a piece of round stick sharpened 
at each end like Fig. 322, and some emery-paper are all 
you will need at first. 



Pottery IVithout a Potter s Wheel 189 



On the pastry-board place a large lump of clay, then 
take a handful of the clay and begin to make 

The Roll 

by turning it lightly between your hands (Fig. 323), When 
the clay lengthens out lay it on the board, and roll under 
your hands, as perhaps 
you have done when mak- 
ing dough snakes. Keep 
your clay snake of an 
even size its entire length, 
be careful not to flatten 
any part, and continue to 
roll it with a light touch 
until it is about the thick- 
ness of your little finger. 
Place your square block 
on the stand before you, 
and in the centre begin 

To Coil the Clay 

(Fig. 324). When you have made a disk about two and one- 
half inches in diameter, lift the roll and build up the sides, 

coiling slowly round and round, 
pinching it slightly as you go, 
with the last row always rest- 
ing on the one just beneath 
(Fig. 325). 

Unless you have made a very 
long roll, which is not easy to 
handle at first, you will soon 
have to stop coiling for lack of material. Do not use all of 
the first roll, but allow the end to rest on the table, where it 
can be joined to the new roll you are to make. Pinch the 




Fig. 323. 



Turn it lightly between your hands. 




Fig. 324. — Begin to coil the clay. 



190 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig- 325. — Lift the roll and build up the sides. 



end of the new roll to 
that of the old and round 
the joint between your 
hands. 

Continue coiling until 
3^ou have made a cup- 
shaped vessel three 
inches high, then break 
off the roll and flatten 
the end to meet the sur- 
face of the brim. Moist- 
en your fingers on the 
sponge, and smooth the 
inside of the cup, holding 
the walls in place with your left hand curved around the 
outside (Fig. 326). Do not press too hard with either hand, 
but slide your fingers gently round and round over the 
inner surface. When the coils on the inside have become 
well flattened mix a little clay and 
water into a paste, and spread it 
on, filling any cracks that may 
still be left between the coils, con- 
stantly smoothing all the time. 

You will find that this process 
has, at first, the effect of broaden- 
ing the base and lowering the 
sides of the cup, and until you 
have quite mastered the method 
you must allow for the broaden- 
ing and flattening of your work. 
Your cup, with a base of two and 
one-half inches and sides three 
inches in height, will now prob- 




Fig. 326. — Smooth the inside of 
the cup. 



Pottery IVithout a Potter s IVheel 191 




Fig. 327. — Turn it into a pretty dish. 



ably be a saucer measuring about four inches across the bot- 
tom, and not more than one inch and a half in height. It 
matters little, though, at this stage what shapes you turn out. 
Do your best with each piece, and if the work flattens turn it 
into a pretty dish by pinching 
the edge to form a little lip,and (^^^^^ 
adding a handle like Fig. 327. ^'^HHlif' 

As you are working with- 
out a wheel the symmetry of 
your pottery must depend en- 
tirely upon your eye and 
hand, therefore keep turning 
the block upon which it stands 
that no irregularity may be overlooked. 

When you add ornaments or handles see that the roll of 
clay from which you make them adheres closely to the 
vessel. Add soft clay to the joints and smooth until the 

whole seems to be of one piece. 
In your first attempts leave 

/~\ VL- ^^^ ^ ^^ outside of the pottery cor- 

- <iy I ") \ rugated by the coils (Fig. 328); 

later work you may smooth, mak- 
ing a surface equal to that turned 
on a wheel. Do not try to finish 
a piece in one day; it is much 
better to allow it to harden a 
little and become set, then make 
it as smooth as you can with your tools, levelling the edges 
and taking away extra thicknesses. If this cannot be done 
at one time, set the work away once more covered with a 
damp cloth and it will keep in good working condition for 
any length of time, but remember, the cloth must be kept 
damp, otherwise the clay will harden. 




Fig. 338. 



-The outside corrugated 
by the coil. 



192 



Ihnidicraff foy Girls 



When vou have perfected your piece of pottery to your 
satislaction put it away to dry, //('/ in the sun. Several days 
later, alter it has become quite hard, i;-o over the surface 
ag"aiu witli knile and emery-paper, sciapinj;- and rubbino- 
down until it is entirely smooth ami free trom Haws. The 
woik will then be ready to take to the potter lor hring;. 

The coK>r of clay changes in liring, and your little [nccc 
ol potteiv will prtUxibly come back to you almost the 
color of old ivory. One cannot be very positive about the 
color, however, for clays vary, and perhaps yours may bo 
of a kind that will fire another color. The potter will 
glaze your work for you il vou wish, or leave it in the 
bisque. Nothing' has been said about what 



Shapes to Make the Pottery, 

for that will depentl much uptMi your own taste and ability. 
Rather low, flat, dish shapes are most easily handled and 
variations in the cup or ilower-pot shape. Alter these may 
come the jars and vases. Set a well-shaped piece of pot- 
tery before you as a nunlel to copy, until you have ideas of 
your own to carry out, and learn to handle your clay before 
attempting- too ambitious a subject. 




CHAPTER XVII 

BABY ALLIGATORS AND OTHER THINGS OF 

CLAY 

HE first chance you have go to 
Florida; you will be charmed 
with all you see. Go where the 
sky is bluest, where winter is 
changed to summer, where the 
wild mocking-bird, the Ken- 
tucky cardinal, the scarlet tan- 
ger, the blue jay and a host of 
other birds are on most friendly terms with girls and boys. 
Go where the wild squirrels live unmolested in the beautiful 
great live-oaks, whose branches are hung with long, soft 
gray moss which swings and sways with the slightest breeze. 
There you will find the home of many baby alligators, 
queer little things whose eyes are provided with three 
eyelids; one is transparent and slides across sidewise like 
a window-glass to keep the water out of the eyes when 
the little fellows want to see what is going on beneath the 
surface. A number of baby alligators in a dry, sunny spot, 
will delight in piling upon each other four and five deep. 
The young owner of twenty of these pets declares that on 
such occasions all the alligators sleep except one who, 
wide-awake, acts as sentinel. At the approach of anyone 
he will swing his long tail over all his companions to 
awaken them and warn them of the danger that may be 

193 



194 



Handicraft for Girls 



near. Fig-. 329 was modelled from a baby alligator who 
conducted himself in a most dignified and exemplar}^ man- 
ner when placed fiat down on a shingle lying on a table; 




Fig. 329. — Alligator modelled from life. 

but first he had to be held in position for a moment in 
order to recover from the excitement caused by being 

taken from his out-of-door 
home and brought into 
strange quarters. 

It is not difficult to 
model a 



Baby Alligator of Clay. 

All you need for the work 
is a lump of soft clay, a 
hat-pin, your fingers, and 
determination to succeed. 




Fig. 330. — Clay for modelling alligator. 



Take a piece of clay (Fig. 330) and roll it between your 
hands until it resembles Fig. 331. Push the two ends 




Fig. 331. — Clay rolled between the hands. 



together, causing the roll to hump up slightly near the 
centre, la}' it down on a board or any hard, flat surface, and 



Baby Alligators 



195 




Fig. 332. — Beginning the head. 




with the fingers carefully pat, squeeze, and push it into the 

form of Fig. 332. Gently smooth out all roughness; then 

nip off little 

pieces of clay 

from the big 

lump for the 

nose and two 

eyes; stick them 

on as in Fig. 333. 

Again smooth 

the rough edges 

until the clay 

looks like Fig. 

334. With a 

little careful 

modelling you 

make the ^'^' 333-— Extra pieces on for eyes and nose. 

head exactly like Fig. 335. Mark the eyes, mouth, and 
nose with the fiat point of the pin. If portions of the 

head become too 
thick, take off some 
of the clay, and if 
at any time the 
head is worked 
down too thin fill 
in the hollow spots 
with clay. In 
modelling one can 
always pinch off 
pieces here and there 
when necessary ; or 
add little bits. 

Fig. 335.-Head finished. SmOOth it all down, 




Fig. 334.— Head almost in shape. 




196 



Handicraft for Girts 



and the places altered will never show the marks of the 
change. 

When the head is finished cover it with a wet cloth to 
keep the clay moist, and begin to make 

The Body. 

Mould another piece of clay like Fig. 336. Run the ball of 




Fig. 336.— Clay for body of alligator. 

your thumb along the sides, making the body the form of 
Fig. 337, broader and thicker through the centre than at the 
two ends. For the tail pull from the large lump a smaller 
amount of clay, roll it and model it like Fig. 338, larger at 




F1&- 337— Body of atligator. 

one end than at the other. The last portion (Fig. 339), like 
the others, is flat on the bottom, and with the exception of 
a small triangle at the heavy end of the tail the two 
sides meet at the top, forming a sharp ridge which decreases 
in height as it tapers down to a point at the extreme end. 
As each part is finished keep it moist with a wet cloth, and 



Baby Alligators 



197 




Fig. 338. — Section of tail. 



when the four sections are made place them in a row (Fig. 
340), then join them 
together, round- 
ing all the edges 
slightly. Fig. 341 
shows how to mark 
the back of the 
alligator. 

Live alligators, 
you know, are en 
cased in a natural 

Coat of Armor 

formed of small plates or shields, and in the clay one must 
imitate the real. Use the hat-pin for marking the lines on 
the head, and trace stripes sidewise across the entire length 




Fig. 339. — Tail of alligator. 




Fig. 340.— Ready to be put together. 



of the body in the manner shown by Fig. 341 from C to D, 
continuing the stripes down each side of the first section of 
the tail (Fig. 329). Next run a line lengthwise through the 




Marking the back. 



entire centre. D to E (Fig. 341) shows how to begin, only you 
must commence the central lengthwise line at C. Mark the 



Fig. 342. — Roll a small piece of c!ay. 



198 



Handicraft for Girls 



g 



Fig. 343. — Break off a part. 




plates on one side 
starting at C, as in- 
dicated from E to 
F (Fig. 341); then 
make them on the 

other side, which will cause a pointed scallop to stand out 

and up on both sides of the space from G to H (Fig. 341). 

On the last section the top ridge will be scalloped H to K 

(Fig. 341). The nostrils are 

distinctly marked by two 

round holes ; make these 

with the point of the pin. 

Cover the alligator over 

with a wet cloth while you 

model his 

Legs. 

Roll a small piece of clay 
(Fig. 342), break off a part 
(Fig. 343) and turn back the 
broken end (Fig. 344). Add 
another piece to it (Fig. 
345), smooth the edges to- 
gether, forming a bend like 
an elbow (Fig. 346), and 
press the end of the leg out 
flat (Fig. 346). Roll five 
small pieces (Fig. 347) and 
fasten them on the flattened 
portion of the leg in the 
positions shown by Fig. 348. 
The foot suggests a human 
hand, the toes taking the 




Fig- 345.— Add another piece. 




Fig. 346. — Press end of 
leg out flat. 



Baby Alligators 



199 




Fig. 347. — Ready to begin the foot. 



places of thumb 
and fingers. 
Rub the toes in- 
to the foot and 
spread out the 
extended, flat- 
tened part of 
the leg-, making 
it appear web- 
like between the 
toes (Fig. 349). 
The foot of the 
real animal has 
nails or claws on 
three of the toes 
(Fig"- 35o)» but you need not attempt this detail. If the 
foot is correct in form and proportion you have made it 
well. Fig. 350 is given merely to show how the natural 
foot looks. 

Model two front and two hind legs and feet; see that 
the hind feet and legs are larger and differently formed 
from the front ones. The hind feet have only four toes 

(Fig. 351). The line A (Fig. 
340) designates the place 
where the front legs should 
be joined to the body, and 
the line B (Fig. 340) shows 
where to fasten on the hind 
legs. That you may have a 
thorough understanding of 
the manner and direction in 
which the joints of the legs 

Fig. 348.-Modelling the foot. bcud, WC will SUppOSC that 




200 



Handle raft for Girls 





Kig- 350.— Fore-foot of alligator 



Fig. 349. — Fore-foot and leg of alligator. 

you rest on the floor on your 
knees and elbows. You will 
then lind that 3'our knees bend 
forward and your elbows back- 
ward, with vour arms corre- 
sponding" to the front legs and 
your legs to the hind legs. Now, 
when you draw or model here- 
after, you will not make any mis- 
take in regard to it. Look again 
at Fig-. 349. The fiuit, V, cor- 
responds to or rudely resembles 
\ your hand; T, your wrist; P, 

^ your elbow ; C), your shoulder. 

Examine Fig. 329. On the hinr* 



Baby Alligators 



201 



leg are the foot, ankle, knee and hip joint. While the alli- 
gator is in a plastic state make him open his mouth, by 
cutting a slit in the head from the front along the waved 
line up back beyond the eye; carefully pull apart the jaws 
(Fig. 352), Have your alligator measure at least fourteen 




Fig. 351.— Alligator's hind-foot. 



inches from tip to tip, for it will be more difficult to model 
a smaller one. Once having made the little creature, you 
will find it easy to model similar animals ; select something 
else in the same line and try to make it. 

Most fruits are readily reproduced in clay. 

The Banana 

is very simple to copy. Roll a piece of clay, making the ends 
bluntly pointed ; bend it slightly as in Fig. 353 and, paying 
strict attention to proportion, carefully form the work like the 




Fig' 352. — Cut open the mouth. 



202 



Handicraft for Girls 




Fig. 353. — Clay ready for modelling banana. 




Fig. 354. — Banana modelled in clay. 

A Head of Washington 

modelled with your own hands 
would have a double value. You 
could show the head to your friends 
and tell them how you made it, and 
should they wish to become amateur 
sculptors, you might help them with 
their work. Make a thick cake of 
clay for the bust. On the back part 
of the top lay a small, round cake to 
form the neck, and push a stick down 
the centre of the neck through the 
bust to the board beneath, allowing 
a portion of the stick to extend up 
beyond the neck ; then roll a piece 
of clay into the form of an o.^^ for 
the head — three times the size of a 
hen's Q^^ — and push it down on the 



original, adding, 
taking from, 
smoothing and 
flattening as may 
be required (Fig. 

354). 

The "Father 
of His Country" 
always com- 
mands a(;imira- 
tion, and every- 
thing pertaining 
to him is inter- 
esting. 




Fig- 355-— Egg-shaped clay for 
head. 



Baby Alligators 



203 




stick (Fig. 355). The stick enters 
the head near the centre of one 
side, so do not push the clay egg- 
on through one end. Continue to 
push the head down until it meets 
the neck. The stick i« necessary 
to give firmness and support to 
the work. Model the head, neck, 
and bust until it looks like Fig, 
356. While modelling you must 
not neglect any part of the head ; 
the work should go on at the sides 
and back as well as the front; 
every now and then turn the stand 
on which your work is placed that 
you may 



Fig. 356. — Head blocked in. 



model 
otherpor- 
tions of the head. In sculpture it 
is essential that objects be made as 
they are ; therein lies the difference 
between sculp- 
ture and paint- 
ing ; in painting 
and drawing 
objects are not 
made as they 
actually exist 
but as they ap- 
pear. 

Be sure to 
have the head 
of correct pro- 




Fig- 357.— Modelling 
features. 




Fig. 358. — George Washington. 



204 



Handicraft for Girls 



portions before beginniiiii^ the featuies ; then take away a 
little of the clay where the nose joins the forehead and cut 
away more clay under the nt)se straight down to the chin, 
according- to the dotted lines which ap[)ear in Fig. 357. 
Hollow out ])laces for the eyes and indicate the mouth 





Fig- 359.— Washington's profile. 
Finished head. 



Fig. 360. — Back of 'Washington's 
head. 



with a straight line. Add more clay for the hair, forming 
it into a queue at the back. 

Be careful to study well the character of Washington's 
face before going on with the work. Notice that it is 
strong, the chin firm and square, the lips tightly closed and 
the mouth almost a straight line, the nose not perfectly 
straight but inclined to be aquiline, the eyes rather heavy- 
lidded ; and the hair, following the line of the head on the 



Baby Alligators 205 

top, is puffed out on the sides, covering both ears. Fig. 358 
gives the front view, Fig. 359 the profile, and Fig. 360 the 
back view of the head. Make the neck full and large. You 
can ke,ep the clay moist with a wet cloth and work on the 
head a little each day. Persevere until you make so good 
a likeness of George Washington that it will be recognized 
at a glance, and ever afterward you will enjoy and appre- 
ciate much more all portraits of him. 




CHAPTER XVIII 

FUNNY LITTLE APPLE TOYS 

UCH a funny little porcupine ! See 
how his pointed spears bristle 
out in every direction, forming a 
fine coat of mail (Fig. 362). If he 
was only alive, he could coil him- 
self up into a prickly ball — not a 
ball, though, that one could 
handle without being hurt. This 
little fellows differs from the 
Hystrix cristata, or real porcupine, in that he did not wait 
until his quills grew to turn into a ball, but was a ball to 
begin with, for he commenced life as an apple, and an apple 
is one of the nicest kinds of balls, as it may be tossed back 
and forth and then eaten later. 

If you can find an apple with a bump on one side, you 
may make a porcupine in less than five minutes, 
for all that is necessar}^ is to stick the apple full 
of wooden toothpicks, and that work will be as 
easy as putting pins into a cushion. Let the 
bump on the apple form the head of the ani- 
mal. Bend four toothpicks like Fig. 361 and 
push them up into the apple to serve as legs 
and feet. Make the bent toothpicks balance ^'e- 361-Bent 

1 1 f 1 11 • .ii toothpick. 

the apple perlectly, so that the porcupme will 

stand firmly on its feet without other support. Use black 

pins for eyes and broom straws for the whiskers. Stick 

8oO 




Funny Little Apple Toys 



207 



them into the head of the animal as shown in Fig. 362. 
Begin at the extreme back of the porcupine to insert the 
wooden toothpicks that are to serve as quills ; although 
they are not hollow it makes very little difference, as this 
wee creature cannot shake them, causing the quills to 
knock against each other, as does the real animal when he 
wants to produce a rustling sound to warn off an enemy. 
Continue pushing in the toothpicks until the apple resem- 




Fig. 362. — The apple porcupine. 

bles Fig. 362. Keep the quills inclined backward and be 
careful not to have them stand out too far; slant the 
quills as much as possible, as the length of the porcupine 
must appear greater than the breadth. Now, if you could 
endow the animal with life, you would find that he was a 
vegetarian ; that is, he could not eat meat, and you would 
be obliged to feed him on fruit, roots, and certain kinds 
of bark. You may be glad, though, that this porcupine 
is only a "make-believe one," for, if he lived, he would sleep 
all day and want to run about and take his exercise during 
the night ; and, more than that, you would feel very sorry 



JoS 



Haudura/t for Girls 



for the poor little fellow, because he would be extunulv 
lonesome so far awav from his native land ot India, Alt lea, 
or some part of Southern Kun^pe. So of the two. all things 

considered, the 

apple porcupine 

uKikes a better pet 

tor the small uhmu- 

bers of the house- 
hold. 

A round, deli- 

catelv piuk-tintod ^- 



Fi«« S64-— Shape 
of eye. 

Fig, 365.— Apple seed 
io centre of eye. 





FIj. SBy.— Sally'; 
opea mouth. 



Fi^. j«i.-The nose. apple IS bcSt for 



Little Sally Walker's 

Head 
(Fig-. 363^ With the small 
blade of a pocket-knife 
cut the eves near the 
centre ot the apple. 
placing' them far apart 
to give an innocent ex- 
pression to the face (Fig. 
;o 0. Cut the lower line 
Fig, 3«^strip of ol the eyes straight ami 

r«per rolled up ^|^j. uopcr CUrVCd. aS in Fis.3«^3 -Sally WcUkers 
tiaht. ' » heH 

^""i^'S^: tiien push the 
small, pointed end of an apple-seed in the centre ot each 
eye ; run the seed in so far that onlv a small portion of the 
blunt end stands out i^big. ^>o5V Cut awav a small, half- 
nioon-shaped piece of the skin v^'^>- 3^^^^ ^"-^ indicate the 
nose. The mouth must be open and made the shape of 
Fig. 367. Cut it into the apple a tritle more than an eighth 
of an inch in depth. Make the curls of two narrow stiij\^ 




Funny Little Apple Toys 



209 



of pajjcr rolled up li^tit 
like Fig. 368 ; then pulled 
out as in Fig. 369. Pin 
one curl on each side of 
the head (Fig. 363). Cut 
a round piece of white 
paper for Sally's collar. 
Make a small hole in its 
centre and slip the collar 
on the end of a stick ; 
then push the stick well 
up intfj the lower part of 
the head (Fig. 363). Keep 
the collar in place by two 
pins stuck through it into 
the apjjle. 

The Indian 

is very different in color- 
ing and expression from 

Sally (Fig. 370;. Notice 

how near together his 

eyes are ; and see how 

long and narrow his nose 

is. If you examine the 

face of the next red man 

you see, or the picture 

of one, you will probably 

find that he has two 
deep, decided lines from his nose to his mouth, and that 
the mouth itself is firm and straight. Remember these 
hints when making the Indian's head. Select a dark-red 
apple, one that is rather long and narrow, if possible, for 




Fig. 369.— Sally's 
curl. 





Fig. 371. — Indian's 
nose. 



Fig. 370.— The apple 
Indian. 



210 



/ /^> > • y /.^>ji // /^>>* /T'*^'A'' 



the red nuinsoKlom luisa rouiui taco. I'ut tworvrsvM w luu> 
papoi- aiul pill lhon\ on tho apple with hl.uk-hoavUHi pins 
piercwl through the centre ol each eye. Make the Kmij; 



I 

\ 




fe»thcr for «j»- 
plc Indian. 

mx^e ot paper iFig'. ^rO. 

Cut two slits elose tv>- 

gether vmi tlu^ taee .\ud 

slide the sides ol the 

nose ^.V.\. l-'iji'. 37 into 

the slits t^Mii'. 370V I'ut 

two more slits, one on 

evieh sivle of the i\v>se. 

down to the corners ol 

the niiHith. and insert in 

each a piece ol narrow 

white paper tv> lojin the lines; then cnt one tnore slit tor 

the niouth and push in a strij^ot white p.iper. which nun- he 

bent down to show a wider portion vl''>- .^T'-'*^- Last, but not 

least. cvMue the v^rnaniental teatheis. II vou can (U^tain 

natural vMies so much the better; il not. make [\iper 

te.ithers ot bris;ht, ditTereniU coKMcd p.iper. l-'ig-. ^^/j 



^"><- 373- The ;»v>plo Jap. 



Funny Little Apple Joys 



211 



shows how f.o cut. t.hcrn. Roll Ihc hc>t.lorri jjort.ioii 1,o make 
a stiff stern and after pmichin;^ holes in the tof) of the a[jple, 




Fig. 374-Applc 
Jap's eye. 





F'g- 375-— For apple 
Jap's hair. 



F'g. 376.— Apple 
Jap's hair. 



forming- them in a row around the crown of the head, push 
each feather in place, having the tallest in the centre, as in 
Fig. 370. Kuii a slender stick up into the bottom of the 
head and you will have something better than taffy-on-a- 
stick. 



The Jap's 

(Fig. 373) features are 
formed very differently 
from those of either 
Sally or the Indian. 
His eyes arc shaped 
like narrow almonds, 
rather ?:)luntly rounded 
at the inner corners 
and pointed at the 
(juter corners. Cut the 
eyes like Fig. 374 of 
black paj>er and stick 
them on the head 
with white-headed pins 
driven through the 
centre of each. Let the 



u 

Fig. 377.— Stick frame for apple Jap. 



I 



212 



Handicraft for Girls 



c\C'S' slant up at the outoi" ci^tnors. lor tliat is the way real 
Japanese eves j^row. Thev i\ever have eves like vSallv's, 





Fig. 379. — Foundation of 
apple tower. 



Fig. 380. — Second floor of 
apple tower. 



Make the nose crescent-sluqied, anti pin it on with two 
white pins. The mouth nuist be much laroer than the 
nose, though cut in similar shape. Hold the nu>uth in posi- 
tion by running a row ol white pins 
thiough it into the head. Tiic pins 
will also form the Jap's teeth. Cut 
the hair of black paper (Fig. 375); if 
you have wo black paper, make scmie 
with ink. h^ringe the hair as in h^ig. 
37(1 ; then fasten the circle of stilT black 
hair cm top of the head with black 
pins, ll^se a russet apple or a yellow 
one for the Jap, because, you know, 
these people do not have led cheeks 
or fair skins. When the head is 
finished, push it down on the top of 
a stick aci'oss which has been fastened 
anc^ther shorter stick near the top 
Fig. 381. -Ready for third (Fig. \'j'j\ INIakc w simpic kiiuonci- 

floor. 





Fig. 378.— Apple tower. 



213 



214 I fa mi i craft /or Cirh 



lilvo gx>\vn ot iKipor and haiii; it on oviM" \\\c Jap's attiis. 
It vou wish, vou can paste the cdi;os oi simuis ot the gar- 

I'iud a til in. sound, louiul apple, and wo can 

Build a Tower 

(^I'ig'. 37v'^). C'uf the huit into r.ithrr ihirk slices. srU^rt the 
middle slice, that being the largest, and stick tour toi^th- 
l>icks into it (^I'ig. oTS))- l'i>ke the slice next in si/eand push 
it down tight v>n top ol the ionf loot hjncks (^Kig\ 380). Stick 
tour nuui^ toothpicks into the second slice (,1'ig. 381). plac- 
ing the loolhpii'ks in the spaces i>n the second slice betwiHMi 
the lowiM' tirst lour toothpicks (^h'ig. ,^^0. 0\\ the toj^s ot 
the last toothpicks fasten another slice ot api>le. then stick in 
nioie toothjMcks aiui so on, alvvavs ren\en)beiing to place 
the ti^p toothpicks in the spaces on the apple slice lelt be- 
tween the lowiM- toothpicks. Iniild uj^ the towcM at least 
seven slices high and ^k^ the woik caietnllv. keeping the 
toothpicks straight and even, that the apple towef may stand 
erect and not uvsend^K- thi^ l.imous Leaning Tinver ot Pisa; 
for if your building should incline \k> one side, as di>es the 
Pis.i tower, if would not long retain that positiiui. but the 
cMitire structure would conn^ tuudiling down, obliging vou 
to trv building again with another aj^ple. 

A tini^ Outi-h windmill can be made ot v>ne apple and a 
paper pin-wheel, and there are lots ot otluM" interi\sting 
things vou m.n m.innlacture from the same- tiuit. 



CHAPTER XIX 



MARVEL PICTURES 




admire and wonder over. 



ERE are Mary, Mary's lamb, 
and Mother Goose's goose 
all waiting for you to dress 
them and make them into 
Marvel pictures. Mary must 
be attired in her clothes, the 
lamb in his wool, and Mo- 
ther Goose's goose in its 
feathers, and you can do it 
every bit yourself. Then 
when all are nicely finished 
you can tack them up in 
your room for everyone to 

We will begin with 



Mary, 

because a little girl is vastly more important than a lamb 
or a goose, however much the others may be petted and 
loved. 

Take a smooth piece of white tissue-paper, lay it over 
the drawing of Mary given here, and with a moderately 
soft pencil make a careful tracing of the little figure. Turn 
the paper the other side up and go over the lines again with 
a very soft pencil ; then lay the paper right side up on a 
piece of white cardboard, a little larger than the page of 

215 



Marvel Pichtres 



217 



this book. See that the figure is exactly in the middle and 
again go over the lines with your pencil. Remove the tis- 
sue-paper and strengthen the lines of your drawing with 
your hardest pencil. If you have a box of water-color 

paints, tint Mary's face, her 
neck and arms flesh-pink. 
Redden her cheeks a little, 
and paint her lips a darker 





Fig. 382. — Mary's dress. 



Fig. 383. — Mary's apron. 



red. Make her eyes blue and her hair a light brown and 
she will be quite ready for 

Her Dress. v 

Fig. 382 IS the pattern, which you must make by tracing it 
on tissue-paper and then cutting it out. Choose any material 



2l8 



Haudicraft for Gir/s 



you like — wool, cotton, or silk, for 
her dress and any color, only let 
it be quite smooth. Lay the tis- 
sue-paper pattern down on the 
goods, pin it in place and cut 
around close to the edges. Tr}' 
the dress on Mary to see that 

Fig. 384.-The brim of sun-bonnet. jj^ j^jg perfectly; thcU COVCr thc 

wrong- side thinly with paste, adjust it to the little figure 
and press down firmly, smoothing out any wrinkles that 
may appear. Cut a white 




lawn apron like the pattern 
(Fig. 383), and paste it over 
the dress bringing the upper 
edge up to the waist line. 
Make a cunning little 

Sun-bonnet 



Fig- 385.~Cro\vn of sun-bonnet. 




Fig. 386.— Plait like this. 



Fig. 387.— Cut 
like this. 



of the white lawn also. Fig. 

384 is the brim, Fig. 385 the 

crown of the bonnet. Cut out Fig. 384 first and (old back 

the flap according to the dotted lines, then Fig. 385, which 

you must plait fan-shape like Fig. 
386, and then cut the shape of 
Fi»- 387. Put a little paste along 
the lower edge of Fig. 387, and 
over it lay the top edge of the 
brim (Fig. 384), pasting them 
together like Fig. 388. Fit the 
bonnet on Mary's head and paste 
it in place, but leave the side-flaps 
Fig. 388.— Mary's sun-bonnet. to Stand out loosely from her face. 




Marvel Pictures 



219 



Mary's Lamb 

can be traced and then drawn on cardboard in exactly the 
samb manner as Mary, or it may be drawn on white writing- 




Fig- 389. — Pattern of lamb's coat. 

paper, cut out carefully and {Kisted on black or ccjh^red 
cardboard. This last is perhaps the better plan as the 
white lamb will show more plainly on a colored back- 
<^i"(niii<l. 

Fi<(. 389 is the pattern for Master Lamb's coat, which you 
are to cut from a sheet of white cr)tton wad- ^__-..--'v 

din^, opened throuj^h the centre to ^ivc the ^ _ ^ 
wooliness of the raw cotton. A. sheep's wool Fig. 390.— Lamb's 
does not <^r(jw lonjj^ on its le^s, so you need <=ap- 

not wonder that the lamb is not provided with leggings. 

Paste the coat on the lamb's back and the little cap (Fig. 
390) on top of his head and he will have all the clothing to 



220 Handicraft for Girls 

\\\\w\\ lu^ is (Mitill(\l. 'X\\c *K>IICil line Inflow tlic l.imh's tMf 
shows liow l.u (ho wool is to n\uh on his l.u(\ .iiul lh.it on 
(lie top ol his head givOvS the limit loi- tho oili;i' ot the ta[>. 




M:uv's lumb. 



\\ hen you have (laeiHl 

Mother Goose's Goose 

and (tanstcMred it to a shetM ot eaulhoard. \ ini nuist eolhuM 
a nwnd>er o\ small teatheis as nuieh as possibU" like the 



Marvel Pictures 



221 



shapes given in the page of diaf^rams. I'erhaps yrju can 
f^ct those plucked from the chicken (or to-day's dinner, or 
you may be allowed to take a lew from mother's feather pil- 




Fig. 391. — Tail feather. 




Fig. 393. -Hody featlier. 



Fig. 395— Wing feather. 




Fig. 394.— How to paste on the body feathers. 



Fig. 396. — Wine 
feather. 





Fig. 398. — Neck and 

breast feather. Fig. 397.— How to paste on the wing feathers. 

How to put the feathers on Mother GooHe's goose. 

]c>ws or cushions. II you do not finfl feathers of just the 
rij^ht shapes take a pair of sharp scissors and trim them 
down to suit. 




Mother Goose's goose. 



Marvel Pictures 



223 



Select three feathers for the tail like the tail feather Fig. 
391, and fit them in place on the goose to see just where 
they are to go ; then take them off, cover the tail with glue 
and carefully put the feathers back in place, pressing them 
down until they stick fast (Fig. 392). Find body feathers 
like Fig. 393 and, beginning near the tail, 
cover part of the body with glue, then 
stick the feathers on, overlapping them 
as in Fig. 394. The under part of the 
body must be entirely covered with these 
feathers, but before going on to the breast 
and neck the wing must be attended to. 

There are two kinds of wing feathers 
— some long and narrow (Fig. 395), and 
others much shorter (Fig. 396). Begin 
at the lower edge of the wing and glue a 
row of the long feathers in place, allow- 
ing the lower edge of one feather to overlap the upper edge 
of another, as in Fig. 397. Along the top edge of the wing 
glue a row of the small feathers (Fig. 397), and then, be- 
ginning again at the lower edge of the wing, cover the 
remainder with the small feathers. 

The short, broad feather (Fig. 398), is the kind to use on 
breast and neck. Begin at the wing and fasten them on, 
going upward until the head is reached, then trim ofE the 
stems of the feathers to fit the space shown by the dotted 
line on the goose's head (Fig. 399). Do not put too much 
glue on the goose at one time, only enough for one row of 
feathers, and spread it very thinly, for it takes but little to 
catch and hold the light feathers in place. 




Fig. 399- 



PART II 
RECREATION 



u 



ia 



tv 



7, '*; :\ ^ ■?■/ 






■■^pi^^^^^s 





Lifting for Pasch eggs, 




CIIy\in7LR XX 

EGG GAMES FOR THE EASTER HOLIDAYS 

Lifting for Pasch Eggs 

IFTING" was one of the many 
curious and interesting^ Piaster 
.- customs of the "<^ood 
'•'' old days" in merry 
; ' England, and we in- 
troduce it here in the 
form of a verj/- jolly 
Easter game. 
First y(ju must 

Prepare the Pasch, or Easter Eggs 

in this way : Select three large white eggs, make a minute 
hole in the small end of each, and another hole the size of a 
silver dime in the large end. Place the hole at the small 
end of each shell to your lips and blow steadily until all the 
c^^ has run out. Then set the shells in a warm place to 
dry while you make ready "something bitter and some- 
thing sweet" with which to fill them. Soft, creamy can- 
dies of a small size are the best for this. Select several 
pieces for each egg, and pour on each of these one drop of 
a weak solution of wormwood or quinine. Mix the bitter 
candy with the sweet, and fill the egg-shells. 

Cut from gilt fjr colored paper three scalloped disks 

227 



228 



Recreation for Girls 




four inches in diameter (Fig. 400). Through the centre 
of each disk pass a needle threaded with doubled black 

linen thread, cover the un- 
der side of the disk with 
paste, separate the two 
ends of the thread and 
hold them down on each 
side of the large end of a 
shell, as shown in Fig. 401 ; 
then draw the disk down 
and paste it upon the shell 
over the threads. If the 
ends of the thread extend 
below the disk, clip them 
off with sharp scissors. 
Wait until the paste is 
quite dry and the paper 
firmly attached to the shells, then hang the eggs by their 
threads in a door-way so that they will be just one foot 
higher than you can reach. 

The Game 

There must be at least two girls and two boys to play 
the game. Fold a shawl or wide scarf until it forms a nar- 
row band. Wrap it around the waist of one of the girls, 
fasten it securely, and blindfold her with a handkerchief. 
Let a boy stand on either side of her, grasp the band firmlv, 
and then march her up to the door-wa}^ where the eggs are 
suspended, chanting these words : 

" Tid, Mid and Mi-se-ra, 

Carling, Palm, and Pasch-egg day. 

Lift you now off your feet, 

Take your bitter with your sweet." 



Fig. 4C». — Cut three scalloped disks like this. 



Egg Games for the Easter Holidays 229 



Reaching the door-way they must halt just before it, and 
when the girl says "Ready" she must jump, the boys at 
the same time lifting her 
by the band around her 
waist. As she jumps she 
must try to catch one of the 
eggs. She can have but 
one trial, and if she suc- 
ceeds in bringing down an 
^gg it is hers ; failing, she 
must wait until her turn 
comes again for the chance 
of securing a prize. 

One of the boys must 
have the next trial, while 
the two girls become the 
"lifters." The same cere- 
mony must be gone through 
with for each player, a girl 
and a boy alternately, and 
the same verse repeated. 

It is not necessary to 
expend any strength in the 
" lifting," for the players 
should jump, and not de- 
pend upon the helpers to be 
lifted up within reach of 
the eggs. When the eggs 
have been pulled down, the 
fun consists in eating the 
candy, , with always the 
certainty of finding some 

bitter drops among the Fig. 401.— Paste the disk on the shell.. 




230 Recreation for Girls 



sweet, and the uncertainty of how soon aiul how often the 
bitter will be found. 

The Egg Dance 

The egg- dance is very old, so old that it is a novelty to 
young people of this generation. It is said that this dance 
lonnerl}' created much mirth, and no doubt it will afford 
our modern girls and boys an equal amount of merriment. 

The Eggs 

To prepare for it, take thirteen eggs, blow the contents 
from the shells, color eight red, gild four, and leave one 
white. The object in removing the egg from the shell is 
to save the carpet from being soiled should the eggs be 
trampled on. If the carpet is protected bv a linen cover 
hard-boiled eggs may be used. 

Place the eggs on the floor in two circles, one within the 
other. The outer circle, formed of the red eggs placed at 
equal distances apart, should measure about eight feet in 
diameter ; the inner circle, formed of the gilded eggs, should 
be four feet in diameter, and the white egg must be placed 
directly in the centre of the inner circle. 

The Dance 

The eggs being arranged the company is divided into 
couples, each in turn to try the dance. The first couple 
takes position within the outer circle — that is, between the 
red eggs and the gilded ones — and, to waltz music, they 
dance around the circle three times, keeping within the 
space between the two circles. Entering the inner circle 
thev waltz three times around the central Q'g^, and all this 
must be done without breaking or greatly disturbing any 
of the eggs. When an egg is broken or knocked more than 



Egg Games for the Easter Holidays 23 1 



twelve inches from its position, the dancers retire and give 
place to the next couple. The broken eggs are not replaced, 
but those out of position are set in order before the suc- 
ceeding couple commence the dance. When each couple 
has had a turn and none have accomplished the feat, all 
change partners and the trial begins again. 

The first couple to go through the mazes of the dance 
without breaking or disturbing any of the eggs win each a 
first prize ; the next suc- 
cessful couple receive 
second prizes, and the 
third are rewarded with 
one colored hard-boiled 
Q%^ which they may di- 
vide between them. 

Easter Angling 

The appliances for 
this game are manufac- 
tured at home, and con- 
sist of three toy hoops, 
such as children use for 
rolling, eight bamboo 
walking-canes, and eight 
hooks made of wire like 
Fig. 402. A piece of 
twine three-quar- 
ters of a yard long 
is tied to the small 
end of each stick, 
and to the other 
end of the twine 

is fastened a hoot, AngUng for Easter eggs. 




232 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig. 402. 
Eight hooks 
made of wire. 



Smooth, stiff, light-brown paper is pasted 
or tacked over each hoop like a drum-head, 
and in this paper covering of each hoop six 
round holes are cut, just large enough to ad- 
mit the small end of an Q%%, or about the size 
of a silver quarter of a dollar. Four of the 
holes are made at equal distances apart, twelve 
inches from the edge of the paper, and the 
other two are near the centre (Fig. 403). 

Eighteen eggs to be angled for are pro- 
vided. They are not boiled, but the shells are 
emptied and prepared for decoration in the 
manner previously described. 




Fig. 403. — Cut six holes in the paper like these. 



Egg Games for the Easter Holidays 233 



They may be painted with 
water-colors, with designs of 
spring flowers and butterflies, 
gilded or silvered, or colored 
with dyes. 

A circle of gilt paper is 
folded twice, which forms Fig. 
404, and an eight-pointed star 
is cut by following the dotted 
lines in Fig. 404. In the centre 
of this is cut a round hole, and 
when opened, the star (Fig. 
405) is the result. 

A piece of narrow white satin ribbon,. three inches long, 
is folded and pushed through the hole in the centre of 




Fig. 404. — Cut the star by following 
dotted lines. 




Fig. 405.— The gilt star. 



234 



Recreation for Girls 



the star, forming a loop; the ends are then pasted to the 

point on either side of the star. 

When the eg-g--shell has received its decoration, this star 

and h^op are glued to the large end of each shell, as shown 

in Fig. 406. 

In twelve of the egg-shells are hidden trifling gifts of 

candv, a tinv penknife, silver thimble, or a trinket of an)' 

kind; in four are slips of paper 
on which are written " Prize 
Ring," and in the other two are 
also slips of paper; on one is 
written " First Prize," and on 
the other " Second Prize." 

Every shell being supplied 
with its gift the holes at the 
small end of the ^^^ are covered 




by pasting over each a small 
round of white paper, the edge 
of which is cut in points to make 
it fit more easilv to the shell. 

Rules of the Game. 

I St. Eight players onl}' can 
take part in the game. 

2d. The three hoops are 
Fig. 4o6.-Giue the star and loop to placcd ou the floor, paper side 

up, at some distance apart. In 
each of the two ordinary rings are placed six eggs stand- 
ing upright in the holes, small end down ; four eggs contain 
presents and two the papers bearing the words " Prize 
Ring." In the third, or prize ring, are four eggs contain- 
ing presents, and the two which hold the papers with the 
words " First Prize " and " Second Prize." 



Egg Gmnes for the Easter Holidays 235 

3d. There must be no distinguishing mark upon any of 
the prize eggs. 

4th. Four players stand around each of the ordinary 
rings. Having once chosen their places they must keep 
them until all the eggs have been taken from the ring. 

5th. Every player is provided with a fishing-rod which 
is held by one end, not in the middle. 

6th. The endeavor of each player is to insert his hook 
through the ribbon loop on one of the eggs and lift it out 
of the ring, doing this as quickly as possible and catching 
as many as he can. 

As each q^^ is taken from the ring its contents are ex- 
amined and the player who first gets a prize-ring ^^^ ceases 
angling until the other prize-ring t,^^ bas been caught. 

7th. When the eggs have all been taken out of both or- 
dinary rings, the two players in each ring who have the 
prize-ring eggs move to the prize ring and angle for the 
eggs which it contains. 

8th. Two prizes, the first and second, fall to the lot of 
the two players who are fortunate enough to secure the 
prize eggs in the prize ring. 

The prizes given for the prize eggs at the prize ring 
should be of a little more importance than those contained 
in the eggs. Instead of trinkets these eggs may contain 
only candy, which will give more prominence to the two 
real prizes given at the end of the game. 

Table Egg-rolling. 

Everyone knows about the egg-rolling where the eggs 
are started at the top of a hill and rolled to the bottom, for 
it has become almost a national game, being played annu- 
ally on the White House grounds in Washington on Easter 



236 Recreation for Girls 

Monday; but there is a new game of egg-rolling to be played 
in the house, in which any person in any place may take 
part. This is played, not with cooked eggs, as in the Wash, 
ington game, but with empty egg-shells, which have been 
blown and left as nearly perfect as possible; and the field 
for the game is a table with a chalked line across either end 
about eight inches from the edge and another line directly 
across the centre. 

The players are divided into 

Two Equal Forces 

wdiich take their places at opposite ends of the table. Each 
player is provided with a fan and the egg-shell is placed 
directly in the centre of the table on the dividing line. At 
the word " Ready" all begin to fan, the object of each side 
being to send the q^^ to its goal across the line at the op- 
posite end of the table, and to prevent its being rolled into 
the goal at its own end. 

On no account must the egg be touched except in plac- 
ing and replacing it on the centre line, wdiich is done when- 
ever a score is made, and when the &g^ rolls off the table ; 
in all other cases it may be moved only bv fanning. Each 
time the q^^ enters a goal it counts one for the side at the 
opposite end of the table, and w^hen the score is marked the 
^.^to mi-^st be replaced in the centre; then, at the given signal, 
the fanning is renewed. 

The winning score mav be ten, fifteen, or twenty-five, but 
it is best not to make it too large, for several short games 
are more enjoyable than one long one. 




CHAPTER XXI 

MAY DAY AMUSE- 
MENTS 



INGLING with the fes- 
tivities of May day in the 
fifteenth and sixteenth 
centuries were certain 
games intended to rep- 
resent the adventures of 
Robin Hood, that bold 
forest chieftain who with 
his band of merry men, 
all clad in Lincoln green, 
held many a contest with 
bow and arrows ; and though most of them were masters 
of the sport, none could quite equal the leader, Robin 
Hood. 

From certain customs of these bygone days we can 
evolve a delightful entertainment and call it the Twentieth 
Century May day. The most important personage on this 
occasion is the May Queen; who must win her crown by 
skill in archery. The next in importance is the King who 
wins his title in the same way. Of course. 

Bows 

and arrows will be needed for the sport, and these we will 
make at home. They will be quite small and easy to raanu- 

237 



2^8 



o 



RecreafioJi for Giyh 



facture, but the bows, thoiigii 
tiny, will work to a charm 
and send the home-made ar- 
rows flying with swiftness 
and precision to their goal. 
Look up a piece of flat rat- 
tan, from which to form the 
bow, such as is often used to 
stiffen stays and dress waists; 
cut it eleyen and one-half inch- 
es in length and burn a hole 
in each end by boring through 
the rattan with a hair-pin 
heated red hot at one end 
(Fig. 407). Holes made in this 
way will not split or break the 
rattan. Pass a strong linen 
thread through the hole in one 
end of the bow and tie it flrm- 
ly (Fig. 408) ; then bring the 
thread across to the other 
end, pass it through the hole, 
leaving a stretch of eight and 
one-quarter inches from end 
to end of the bow, and tie the 
end securely (Fig. 410). 



Make the Arrows 

of slender sticks ten inches in 
length and sharpened to a 
point at the heavier end (Fig. 
409). Whittle the arrows as 
round as possible. If you 



Fig. 407.— The 
bow of rat- 
tan. 



J 



Fig. 408.— 
Fastening 
on the bow- 
string. 



May Day AmMsements 



239 




A 



Fig. 410. — Bow strung ready for arrow. 

happen to have old, slender, long-handled 
paint brushes, they will make fine arrows 
with the brush taken off and the large 
end pointed. 



Fig. 409. — Arrow 
of paint brush 
handle. 



240 



Kccrcafio/i for Ciir/s 




Fig. 411. — Paper cover for target. 



The Target 

may also be homc- 
niadc ; lor this use a 
small hoop — a barrel 
hoo[> will do — aiul cov- 
er it with paper. Take 
anv kitui of paper 
strong" enoui;h to hold, 
but not too stilT, and 
cut it three or four 
inches larger in cir- 
cumference than the 
hoop. Lay the hoop 
down flat on the paper 
and dra^v a line around its edge ; then slash the paper 
around the edge, cutting deep enough to almost reach the 
circle marked by the hoop (Fig. 411). Cut silhouettes of 
spring flowers from 
yarious bright-colored 
tissue-paper. Lay a 
piece of tissue-paper 
over each flower pat- 
tern here giyen, and 
trace the outline di- 
rectly on the tissue- 
paper. Make a cow- 
slip (Fig. 412^ of yellow 
paper for the centre of 
the target, and aboye 
it place (Fig. 413) a 
yie»let of violet tissue- 
paper, and under the Kig. 413.— cowsup for target. 




May Day Anmsements 



241 



centre fasten a Jack- 
in-the-pulpit of green 
tissue-paper (Fig. 414); 
at the right attach a 
pink azalia (Fig. 415) 
and at the left a scar- 
let tulip (Fig. 416). 
Over the remaining 
blank portion scatter 
bright silhouettes of 




Fig. 413. — Violet for target. 




Fig. 414. — Jack-in-the 
pulpit for target. 



Fig. 415. — Azalia for target. 



242 



Recreation for Girls 



other flowers. Each 
wild blossom has its 
own value : the yellow 
centre cowslip counts 
10; violet, 9; Jack-in- 
the-pulpit, 8 ; pink az- 
alia, 7; scarlet tulip, 6, 
etc. When the paper 
flowers are ready, lay 
the large target paper 
on a perfectly flat, 
hard surface ; then, 
using paste only 
around the edges of 
the flowers, fasten 
each one in position 
on the target paper, 
beginning with the 
central cowslip. When 
finished turn the paper 
over on the wrong side 
and lay the hoop on it 

over the circular line previously drawn. The hoop must 

first have a strong staple driven in its top (Fig. 417). Turn 

up the slashed edge of the paper and paste it down over 

the hoop. Fig. 418 shows a portion of the flaps glued over 

it. Be sure when covering the 

hoop to keep the paper perfectly 

smooth and free from all wrinkles 

or fulness, as shown in the target 

(Fig. 419). 

Select a good position on a 

tree or fence. Drive in a nail at Fig. 417.— staple in hoop. 




Fig. 416. — Tulip for target. 





May Queen and King and loyal subjects. 



May Day Amusements 



243 



the proper height and hang the target by the staple in 
its rim ; then with a stick or stone mark a line on the 
ground about three yards from and directl}^ in front of the 
target. Let each player in turn stand with toes touching 
the mark and shoot one arrow at the target. Someone 
must keep tally, and as each arrow strikes or misses make 
a record of the shot. When all have had one trial the 




Fig. 418. — Portion of flaps glued over 
hoop. 



Fig. 419. — Target with silhouettes of 
flowers. 



second round may be played ; then the third, which finishes 
the game of archery and decides the relative places of all 
the company. 

The girl and boy with highest records are 

Queen and King, 

the next highest maids-of-honor and gentlemen-of-the- 
Court; the others fall in line according to their records on 
the target, and the entire party strikes out for the nearest 
stretch of land where wild flowers are to be found. Out 
from the shade they go into the sunshine, where the new 



244 



Recreation for Girls 



springing grass is tender and green, and a little beyond 
under the trees where a mysterious perfume, the breath of 

awakening Nature, per- 
vades the air, where grow 
the modest blue-eyed vio- 
lets, the fragrant trailing 
arbutus, spicy and sweet, 
the funny Jack-in-the- 
pulpit, without which no 
collection of wild flowers 
would be complete, and 
where also may be found 
the rare and beautiful 
bloodroot, whose stay is 
so short one can scarce 
catch a glimpse of its pure, 
white blossoms ere they 
vanish. 

The Queen Rules, 

and the King shares her 
honors. All the subjects 
must yield implicit obe- 
dience; but, on the other 
hand, the Queen should 
issue onl}^ unselfish and 
kind commands, such as 
are sure to render her peo- 
ple happy, for the thought 
of their comfort and pleasure should ever be uppermost. 
The delicate little blossoms of early spring need very 
careful handling, and it would be well for the King and his 
gentlemen to be provided with old kitchen knives or trow- 




Fig. 420. — Take the flowers up roots and all. 



May Day Amttsements 



245 



els, that they may be able to dig around and under the little 
plants in order to take the flowers up root and all, with the 
earth clinging to them (Fig. 420) ; each one can then be 
carefully placed upright in 
a flat-bottomed basket or 
box and carried home in 
safety. Better still would 
be a number of tiny water- 
proof paper flower-pots, 
which may be purchased per 
dozen for a trifling sum. 
In each pot place one plant 
with plenty of damp earth 
surrounding it, and upon 
reaching home tie a gay 
narrow ribbon throus^h 
holes pierced on each side ; 
the little receptacle will 
then make a charming May- 
basket, and the wild flowers 
will keep fresh and bloom- 
ing for a long time (Fig. 
421). 

While the King 
and his men are 
at work digging 
up the plants the 
Queen and her la- 
dies can gather the 

buds and blossoms, picking them with as long stems as 
possible and remembering to have a few green leaves of 
each plant with its blossoms. To keep the flowers from 
wilting, as they would if held in the hand, let each girl be 




Fig. 421. — 'Water-proof paper flower-pot May-basket. 



246 



Recreation for Girls 



provided with a clean, perfecth- drv baking-powder can 
which has a lid that tits tightlv ; the bh>ssonis must be 
without moisture and verv careluUv pUiced within the can 
as soon as they are plucked. When the tin box is tilled the 
cover can be lifted on securelv to exclude all the air. The 
i^reen leaves mav be carried in the hand, and when thev 
droop thev can be revived bv being- placed in Iresh water. 
The bit of wildwood brought home in the form of dainty 
cut flowers could be put in water until dark, when the little 

May-baskets 

are readv for their reception. These baskets should always 
be small and must never be crowded with flowers ; it is 




Fig. 422. — Beginning wire May-basket. 



Fig. 423. — Basket ready for handle. 



better to have onlv one variety of blossom with its' foliage 
for each basket. 

INIanufacture the May-baskets of paper boxes, colored 
straws, wire, and cardboard. Those of wire can be made to 
resemble coral and are pretty when shaped like that shown 
at Fig\ 425. Make a ring of wire about the size of the top 
of a very large teacup by twisting the two ends of the wire 
together, then pull it into an oblong shape curved downward 
at the two ends. Form another smaller ring, connect the 
two by a length of wire fastened on one end (Fig. 422) ; twist 
the \vire on the bottom loop and bring it across the bottom 



May Day Aimisements 



247 



and up on the other side end (Fig. 423). Proceed the same 
way with the broad sides, extending the wire up and across 
the top to form the handle (Fig. 424); if more braces are 
needed, add them, and tie bits of string in knots of various 
sizes at intervals all over the basket frame to form projec- 
tions for the branches of coral. 

Transform the wire into coral by melting some white 
wax and mixing with it powdered vermilion. Wliile the 




Fig. 424. — Wire basket to be turned into 
coral. 



Fig. 425 — Coral May-basket. 



wax is in a liquid state hang the basket on the end of a poker 
or stick and, holding it over the hot wax, carefully cover 
the frame with the red mixture by pouring the wax over 
the basket with a long-handled spoon. The wax cools rap- 
idly and forms a coating closely resembling coral ; the little 
lumps and projections that form give the basket the appear- 
ance of real coral, which is branching and uneven. 

As soon as the wax has hardened (Fig. 425) insert in the 
basket a pasteboard bottom cut to fit ; and when filling this 
basket with flowers place the foliage around the sides first. 



248 



Recreation for Girls 



The fresh green contrasting with the red coral gives a 
pretty effect, and the leaves filling the spaces between the 
wires prevent the flowers from falling through. 



The "Old Oaken, Moss-covered Bucket" 

is very appropriate for woodland blossoms. Make the 
bucket of a strip of cardboard ten by four inches ; sew the 
two ends together and cut a circular piece for the bottom ; 

fit it in and fasten with long stitches. 
Cut the handle of cardboard one- 
quarter of an inch wide and sew it 
in place. Cover the bucket with 
strips of olive-green tissue-paper an 
inch and a half wide which have pre- 
viously been crimped by being folded 
backward and forward. Cut the 
strips in very fine fringe, unfold and 
gum them on the bucket in closely 
overlapping rows, as the cardboard 
must be entirel}'^ concealed to have 
the appearance of being covered with 
natural moss (Fig. 426). 

A May-basket 

which can be made in a moment is 

simply a bright-colored paper six 

inches long and three inches wide, 

with one of its long sides brought 

together at the two corners from the middle and fastened 

securely. A narrow ribbon forms the handle (Fig. 427). 

Just at dusk the flowers may be arranged in the baskets 

with as little handling as possible. Then, when twilight 




Fig. 426. — Old oaken bucket 
May-basket. 



May Day A^nuseinents 



249 



comes, the May day party can steal cautiously to- the door 
of the house fortunate enough to be favored by a May- 
token, hang one of the little baskets of flowers on the door- 
knob, ring the bell and scamper away before they are seen, 
for no one of the 
party must be 
present when the 
door opens. 



Bell and Ball 
May-pole Game 
for Country or 
City 

If you live in 
the country erect 
your May pole on 
the lawn or in an 
open field ; if in 
the city put it up 
in the back-yard, 
or if it rains or 
is cold hold your 
May day games 
in the house. In any case the pole should be planted in a 
tub as in Fig. 428, and decorated as shown in the illustra- 
tion. The pole must be round and smooth and stout 
enough to support the weight of the hoops at the top. 
For an out-of-doors pole from ten to twelve feet is a 
good height, but an indoor pole must be adapted to the 
height of the ceiling of the room it will occupy. 

Before placing the pole in the tub nail securely to its 
base a piece of board eighteen inches square, as shown in 




Fig. 427. — Colored paper May-basket. 



2qo 



Recreation for Girls 



Fig. 4jS. Erect the pole in the niiddU^ ol the tub. put in 

cross-pieces iFig. 428). nailing them at the ends and till in 

all around with stones or bricks, as in 

Fig. 4J9. 



How to Dress the May-pole 

Cover the tub with green crimped 
tissue-paper and bank up with flowers — 
paper flowers if no others can be obtained. 
Beginning at the top, wrap the pole with 
ribbon or strips of pink and white cam- 
bric in alternate stripes. This can best 
be done before the pole is erected. Buy 
two toy hoops, the smallest measuring 
about three feet, the largest four feet in 
diameter. Wrap these hoops with greens 





Fig. 438. — The pole is planted 
in a tub. 



Fig. 439. — Fill in with stones. 



k\ i/ 









^^k--^''^ 


















O 



^^ 



\ ^ '. 







The first player throws the ball. 



May Day Amusements 251 



of some kind — evergreens if 3'ou can find no (others — add- 
ing sprays c^f tree blossoms and all the fiowers you can 
manage to get. 

Besides the two large hoops )'ou will need fourteen 
small ones about nine inches in diameter. These you can 
make of wire for yourself. Wrap eight of the small hoops 
with pink, and six 
with white cambric, 
then decorate with 
flowers and green 
leav^es. Keep the de- 
coration quite nar- 
row, in order to leave 
as large an opening 
as possible in the cen- 
tre. Get two and 
two-thirds yards of 
narrow pink ribbon 
and two yards of 
narrow white rib- 
bon ; divide the pink 

into ei2!"ht and the ^*S- 430. — On the end of each ribbon fasten a small 

K 11 

white into six pieces. 

On the end of each ribbon fasten a small toy bell ; tie the 
ribbon on the small hoops, the white ones on the white 
hoops, the pink on the pink hoops, as shown in Fig. 430. 
Space the largest hoop off into eight equal parts and tie 
the small pink hoops to it at these points by their ribbons. 
Divide the other hoops into six equal parts and attach the 
small white hoops in the same manner. With wire or rib- 
bon suspend the hoops from the top of the pole as in the 
illustration. Decorate the top of the pole with small flags 
and flowers. 




252 



Recreation for Girls 



The Balls 

Make four paper balls in this way : Take a piece of 
newspaper and, placing a small weight of some kind in the 
middle, crush it and roll it into a ball four inches in di- 
ameter; place the ball in the centre of a square of tissue- 
paper and bring the four corners of the paper together 
over the top ; overlap the corners and fold and smooth 
down the fulness at the sides. Wrap the ball with fine 
cord, making six melon-like divisions, as in Fig. 431. Make 
two of the balls of pink tissue-paper 
and two of white. Have ready on 
a tray a number of small favors con- 
sisting of two or three flowers tied 
together, some with pink, some with 
white ribbon. 

The decorations of the pole may 
be added to or curtailed as circum- 
stances permit, and if flowers are 
Fig. 431.— Wrap the ball with scarce Dapcr flowers mav be minsfled 

fine cord. . , \ ^ , - , , ^ , . , 

With the natural ones, and the dit- 
ference will hardly be noticed. When 

The Game 

is held in the house the room is cleared of as much 
furniture as possible. The prettily decorated May-pole 
stands in the middle of the floor, and the children join 
hands and dance around it to the accompaniment of the 
piano or an appropriate song sung b}' all. Beginning with 
slow time, the music grows faster; faster and faster the 
wheel of children spins arouvid the pole until some hand 
slips from the one clasping it and the wheel parts. 
When this happens the circle opens at the break and the 




May Day Anitisenients 253 



children, still keeping their places, back up against the 
wall. 

To the first four children at the right end of the line the 
four paper balls are given, one to each. The first child, or 
Number One, takes three steps forward and, aiming at the 
bell in one of the hoops, throws the ball with the purpose of 
sending it through the hoop and at the same time striking 
the bell hard enough to make it ring. If successful, Num- 
ber One is given a favor, to be pinned to the front of the 
coat or dress, as the case may be, the color of the ribbon 
attached to the favor being in accordance with the color of 
the hoop through which the ball passed. As it is more 
difficult to send the ball through the hoops in the second 
row, the white-ribboned favors confer the most honor. 

As soon as Number One has played he or she gives the 
ball to Number Five and returns to his or her place; then 
Number Two takes a turn, giving his ball afterward to 
Number Six, and so on down the line, thus always keeping 
the children about to play supplied with balls. 

The game goes on until the players are tired or the 
favors give out, and the object of the players is to win as 
many favors as possible. 



CHAPTER XXII 



HALLOWE'EN REVELS 

N Hallowe'en vou will not be obliged 
to travel wav ofif to shivery, 
cold Klondike to dig for 
your fortune, because the 




' :~ff fairies bring the 

Gold Nuggets 

nearer home; possibly you 
may haye to work a little for the precious metal, but the 
exertion will be only fun. Ten little fairies — your ten 
fingers — will cheerfully supply the gold as well as the 
mine from which the nuggets must come on the eventful 
night. The fairies should make a number of small gold 
parcels which when finished form the nuggets (Fig. 432). 
Inside of each package is a piece of candy and a strip 
of paper with a fortune written upon it, so whateyer may 
be the fate sent by the gnomes in the mine, it is sure to 
be sweet. Have enough 
lumps of gold to furnish 
each plaj'cr with equal 
portions of one or more 
nuggets. Let the little 
fairies secure a tub, half- 
fill it with sand or saw- 
dust and hide the gold 
nuggets well in this home- 




tig- 432. — The gold nugget. 



254 



Halloween Revels 



255 



made gold mine, scattering the little parcels through the 
sand like plums through a pudding. The fairies must stand 
a small shovel by the side of the mine, then all will be ready 
and the miners can dig for their fortunes (Fig. 433). 

Each i^layer in turn must take the shovel and dig in the 




Fig- 433- — Hallowe'en miners at work. 



mine until one gold nugget is found. He must then open 
the package carefully and read aloud the fortune Fate has 
given him, while the other players look on and listen. The 
fairies can readily whittle or saw out a wooden mining 
shovel from a shingle or thin box-lid. Tell them to make it 
about four inches long and three wide, with a handle eleven 



256 



Recreation for Girls 



inches in length. Try to think of original 
ideas to write on the slips of fortune paper, or, 
failing these, look up apt quotations for the 
prophecies. If you can have the lines bright 
and witty, writing something that will cause a 
laugh when read aloud, without hurting any- 
one's feelings, your Hallowe'en mining will be 
a great success. 



Fig. 434. — Stick 
for apple witch. 



The Apple Witch 

understands well the art of fortune-telling. 
She is a funny little creature made of a stick 
(Fig. 434), some yellow tissue-paper and an 
apple. A strip of the tissue-paper is gathered 
(Fig. 435), drawn tight together at the top and 
placed over the stick with a thread wound 
around a short distance from the top to form 
the head (Fig. 436). The arms are pieces of 




Fig. 435. — ^Tissue-paper for making witch. 



Halloween Revels 



257 



tissue-paper (Fig. 437) fold- 
ed lengthwise (Fig. 438) 
and run through a hole 
punched in the body (Fig. 
439). The face is marked 
with ink on the head (Fig. 
439). Small strips of tissue- 
paper gathered like Fig. 
440 are sewed on each arm 
to form the sleeves. Hair 
of black thread or darning 
cotton tied in the centre 
(Fig. 441) is sewed on the 
yellow paper head. 

The Witch's Hat 

is a triangular piece of 
paper (Fig. 442) with edges 

pasted together and a Cir- Fig. 436.-Head formed for witch. 

cular piece of paper slightly slashed around the small hole 
in the centre (Fig. 443). The circular piece is slid down 

over the peak to form the 
brim (Fig. 444), glued on, and 
the entire hat is inked all 
over, dried and fitted on 
the little woman's head. A 
broom made of a strip of 
folded tissue-paper (Fig. 
445) with a fringed piece 
of the same paper bound 

on for the broom part (Fig. 

^ 446) is sewed in the folded- 
Fig. 438.— Paper folded for arms. OVCr end of the witch's 





Fig- 437- — Tissue-paper for witch arms. 



258 



Recreation /or G/r/s 



Fig. 440. — Sleeves 
for witch. 



arm. When iinishcd the 
point of the stick is pnshed 
into an apple, and the apple 
placed upon a 
piece ot paper 
) divided into 
squares in 
which dilTer- 
ent fortunes 
are written (Fig. 447). When 
von want the witch to tell 
your fortune, spin the apple 
on the blank centre of the 
paper and wait until the 
witch is again quiet, and 
she will point with her 
broom to some spot where 
the fortune is written es- 

Fig. 439— Arms run throush hole in body of witch, peciallv for VOU. Kach o"irl 

and bov must be allowed 
three trials with this apple witch (Fig. 
44S). 






Fig. 441. — Black hair for witch. 



Fig. 442. — Crown of witch hat. 



Halloween Revels 



259 





Fig- 443- — Brim of witch hat. 



Fig. 444. — Witch hat. 



Ghost Writing 

is very mysterious and exciting. Dip a new clean pen 
in pure lemon juice and with this queer 
ink write mottoes or charms on a num- 
ber of pieces of writing-paper. Allow 
the ink to become perfectly 
dry, when it will fade out com- 
pletely ; then place the charms 
in a box and let each girl and 
boy in turn draw what ap- 
pears to be a blank slip of paper. 
After examining it, the paper 
should be handed to some grown 
person present who is in the 
secret and who has provided a 
lighted candle by means of which 
he may read the ghost writing. 
All the young people will clus- 
ter around and with bated breath 
Fig. 445. watch the magical developing 

Witch broom ^ ^ *= 

handle. of the words on the blank paper Fig. 446-— witch broom. 




26o 



Recreation for Girls 



as the reader moves the message back and forth over 
the lighted candle. The heat brings out the writing 
in distinct letters that all may see. A second charm 
must not be taken trom the pile until the lirst has been 
read aloud. 



YOU WILL 
PASS YOUR 
EXAMINATION 


YOU WILL 

BE A 
FAVORITE. 


YOU WILL 

WRITE A 

BOOK. 


YOU WILL BE 
A COMFORT TO 
YOUR FAMILY 


YOU WILL 
LEARN TO 
SINO WELL 


Y0UWILLALWAY3 
BE KIND AND 
CONSIDERATE, 


YOU WILL 
PAINT A 
PICTURE. 


YOU WILL 
GOON A 
JOURNEY 


YOU WILL 
HAVE A 
HORSE, 


YOU WILL 

COMPOSE 

NUSIC, 


YOU WILL HAVE 

A BEAUTIFUL 

GARDEN. 


YOU WILL 

HAVE A 

CANDY PULL. 


YOU WILL 
GOTO 
A FAIR. 


YOU WILL 
EARN A 
FORTUNE 


YOU WILL 

ALWAYS BE 

HAPPY. 


YOU WILL 

MEET NEW 

FRIENDS. 


YOU WIU 
00 TO A 
DANCE 


C) 


YOU WILL BE 
A CHAMPION 
GOLF PLAYER. 


YOU WILL 
GOTO A 
CIRCUS, 


YOU WILL 
ALWAYS BE 
BRIGHT &SUNNY 


YOU WILL 
LIVE IN A 
CASTLE. 


YOU WILL 

BE WISE 

WHEN GROWN. 


YOU WILL 

BE AN 

INVENTOR. 


YOU WILL 

HAVE LOTS 

OF PETS. 


YOU WILL 

HELP 
OTHERS. 


YOU WILL 

WRITE 
POETRY. 


YOU WILL 
PADDLE 
A CANOE 


YOU WILL 

BE 
FAMOUS. 


YOU WILL 

LIVE IN A 

FOREIGN LAND. 


YOU WILL 

VISIT THE 

WH1TEH0U5E. 


YOU WIU BE THE 
BEST SCHOLAR 
IN THE CLASS. 


YOU WILL 
WALK ON 
STILTS. 


YOU WILL 

SAIL A 

BOAT. 


YOU WILL 

RUN A 

RACE. 



Fig. 447. — Fortune chart. 



If vou have 



A Four-leaved Clover, 



even though it be a pressed one. vou can put it m vour 
shoe on the morning of October 31 and wear it until 
you retire at night. The clover is a charm which will bring- 
good luck and will insure at least one hearty laugh before 
the next dav. 



Halloween Revels 



261 



A glimpse into the future showing the disposition of 
your sweetlieart may be had by 



Tasting Apple-seeds 

which have previously been dampened and each dipped 
into a separate fiavoring. The moisture will cause the 
spices, etc., to cling to the seed, giving various flavors. 
Those dipped in liquids 
must, of course, be 
afterward dried. If to 
your lot falls a seed 
which has been powder- 
ed with pulverized 
cloves, your life com- 
panifjn will never be 
dull and uninteresting ; 
pepper denotes quick 
temper; sugar, affection 
and kindness; cinnamon 
is lively, buoyant and 
bright; vinegar, sour 
and cross ; gall, bitter 
and morose; molasses, 
loving but stupid; 
lemon, refreshing and 
interesting. Add as 
many more flavors as 
you wish. When the 
seeds have been pre- 
pared and dried wrap 
each one in a small 
piece of white tissue- Fig. 448.— Apple witch. 




262 Recreation for Girls 



paper and pass them around to the young people, allowing 
each girl and bo}' to take two of the prophecies; then all 
the children must be quiet while each in turn tastes first 
one, then the other seed, telling aloud as he does so the 
particular flavor he has received. Should a player find 
the first seed sweet and the other sour, it would mean 
that the disposition of the future wife or husband will 
var}^, partaking more of the stronger flavoring. If the 
taste of the first apple seed is pleasant, the married life 
of the player will be reasonably happy. If the flavor is 
very agreeable, the married life will be verv happy ; if 
the flavor proves unpleasant, it is best to remain single. 
A very jolly time may be had with 

Fortune Bags. 

Purchase or make a number of brown paper bags of medium 
size. In each place a simple little gift such as a tiny home- 
made doll, a paper toy you have manufactured or a picture 
of a young woman or man cut from a newspaper and pasted 
neatly on a half sheet of fresh writing-papei% drop a nut 
in the fifth bag and add other home-made gifts for other 
bags, and label each appropriately. Pin a piece of paper 
on the doll with these words written on it, " Dorothy's 
new doll" (if none of the girls happens to have that name 
use another in its place). Under the young woman's pict- 
ure write, " Marie when she is grown," and under the young 
man's write, " This is Malcolm when he is a man." Change 
the names if they do not represent au}^ of the party. After 
a gift has been dropped in, take the bags one at a time 
and blow them full of air, do not allow the air to escape 
while you wind a string around the openings and tie them 
securely. The bags, being puffed out with air, will appear 




A Convalescent Witch. 



■ Halloween Revels 263 

much the same, rendering it impossible to tell, by merely 
looking at them, which contain the largest gifts. All the 
bags should be tied on a strong string, forming a fringe of 
bags stretched across the room. The young people should 
draw lots for first choice of the fortune bags, then each 
player in turn must point to the bag selected, no one being 
allowed to tcjuch a bag until the leader has clipped it from 
the string. Only one bag can be given out and opened at 
a time, in order that all ma}' see and enjoy the contents of 
each separate fortune. All young people enjoy the fun of 
trying their fortunes. Even when convalescent and not yet 
quite strong enough to join in the general frolic, they may, 
in a quiet way test many old-time and some new prophecies. 
The three saucers is one as in the illustration. The apple 
seeds charm commencing with "One I love" is another 
and for new ideas there is The Feather test. Witch Writ- 
ing, etc. 



(MiAni<:R will 



THE MAGIC CLOTH AND WHAT IT WILL DO 




N Imlia (hero live wntiuloiiul iiumi who 
can ]>ortotni I ho most startlinj;' teats. 
^ such as makiui;- snuill plants oidw up 
>4£ -^ tail and lar^o in a low nuin\onls, and 
who. b\- repeat iui;- certain magic 
^\^ wonls, cause water to mvsteii- 

\ •c_v,>^--V4,~vA>^ ouslv spiiui:- frt)m the dry earth 
and tdl a hollow, protluciui;- a tinv 
lake iMi which little biKits can sail. C)t course, we do not 
understand lunv such things can be ilone. never having seen 
them; but there are certain amazing and astiMiishing feats 
that we do comprehend antl which we can perform. C^ur 
jumping frog is so lively and tunny that even the most 
grave and serious person would smile to see the little 
animal actually move and sudtlenlv leaj^ up in the air. 

Make the Frog Jump 

With a si)ft lead-pencil trace the frog (Fig. 440") on trac- 
ing-paper; then transfer it to a very soft, pliable piece of 
Ti7///r cotton tnull or any white cloth that will stretch readily 
when pulled, tor stretch it must, or the frog will not jump. 
Turn the square of cloth so that it will resemble the ace of 
diamonds in a pack of playing-cards, haying one point up, 
(Mie down, one at the right and c>ne at the left hand. 
Fasten the cloth over a piece of white paper mi a smooth 

204 



266 



Recrcafioii for Giris 




biKinl or tabic with lluimh-tarks 
(>v stroni;* pins. \\mv cairlullv 
phu\' the t iacinii--pa|>oi". on which 
\ on have ilrawn (he tVoo- t^l-'ii;-. 449^ 
ovtM- the (.Mot li. allowing- the head 
to eonie inuief the top point of 
the square aiui (he leet to exteiul 
toward the lower point. Mr. Froo- 
niav then be drawn exactly on the 
bias weave of the cloth. When 
\ on have linished the tracing, go 
o\ er the lines again with a si>ft 
lead-pencil to make the mai^kings 
clear and (.listinct. 

Look at the trog to be sure he 
is correctly tlrawn; then renunc 
the i>ins and. allow ing the cloth to 
remain im the table oyer the piece 
of snuH")th w hite paper, spread both 
of Nour hands out on the cloth, one 
at each side of the frog, and, keep- 
ing \onr eves on the drawing, mi^yo 
\ our hands gradually outward, at 
the same time moving the mull 
with them. The stretching ot the 
bias material will cause the frog to 
flatten out until he crouches lor a 
spring (Fig. 430V C^nitiouslv raise 
\ our hands up ami oil the cloth 
and j^lace them down again in a 
dilTerent way; put one above and 
the other below his Frc\gship, and. 
still keejMug vinir eves on the lig- 



The Magic Cloth 



267 



lire, suddenly move your hands, stretching the square up 
and down, when the frog will give a quick leap and 
spring straight upward in the most unexpected manner 
(Fig. 451), 

Cut the squares of material large enough to be easily 




Fig. 452. — "We are hungry." 

handled; if made too small your hands will slip off the 
edges. 

Feed the Birds 

Have you ever seen little young birds in their nest? 
How they huddle together with their large 3^ellow mouths 
open wide watching for their mother to return with their 
dinner! Trace the drawing (Fig. 452) on bias cloth anrl 



268 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig- 453- — "Here comes 
our dinner." 



you can make these 
little birds move and 
really stretch up 
their heads for their 
dinner as you slow- 
ly pull the cloth 
upward and down- 
ward (Fig. 453)- 
Watch them. Then 
stretch the cloth 
out s i d e w i s e and 
see the bird lings 
quietly settle down 
in their nests with a 
"Thank you" and 
"Good-by" (Fig. 
454). 

See the Children 
Talk 

Trace the girl and 
boy (Fig. 455) on bias 
cloth as you did the 




Fig. 454. — "Thank >cu ' 
and "Good-by." 



The Magic Cloth 



269 




Fig. 455- — "I can beat you spelling." 



Fig. 456. — " You can't, either, 



frog-. Fig. 455 shows 
how the children ap- 
pear when they meet. 
Pull the cloth side- 
wise and their faces 
change expression 
(Fig. 456); they do not 
seem to enjoy their 
chat. Now pull the 
cloth in the opposite 
direction, and in an 
instant theirfaces show 
surprise and dismay 
(Fig. 457)- 




Fig. 457.— " Oh ! Oh! We are 
both at the foot of the class." 



270 



Recreation for Gir/s 



Make the Tenor Sing 

1 wonder if vou over attonclotl a coiu-ert wIumc the 
tenor had diffieultv in reacluno- his high notes, where he 
fairly seemed to rise np on his toes in his elTorts to 
attain the notes as liis voice ran up the scale, and every- 
one in the andience sympathized to such an extent that 




Fig. 458.— D 0. 

thev, too. felt like risino- aiul stretching- up their heads 
in search of the difficult note. Such a tenor is shown at 
Fi*-^-. 459. Trace him on bias clotii and pull the cloth out 
sidewise (,Fig-. 458'^; then, beginning with the hnver note, 
</('. slowly sing- the scale as vou leisurely pull the cloth up- 
ward and downward at the same time. When you cmne to 
sol the face should be like Fig. 459. and as vou continue 



The Magic Cloth 



27 



siii^in^ and slrctchiiii^ l.lic cloth, the Iciujr shoulrl resemble 
Fij^. 460 when you reach your hi^hesl. do. Thoui^'h not a 
very high note it is tlie best he can do, and he lf>oks very 




Fig 459-— S O L. 



comical while his face is changing, his eyes and mouth 
opening wider and wider and his hair rising up straight on 
the top of his head. 

The rjbjects which are here illustrated may be replaced 
by others with equally amusing results; any animals, such 



272 



Recreation for Girls 




$ 



Fig. 460.— D O. 



as goats, rabbits, camels, 
hounds, may be drawn on the 
cloth and then manipulated so 
as to afford the greatest amuse- 
ment. 

You can have any amount 
of fun with the moving fig- 
ures on your magic cloth if 
you will remember the impor- 
tant points, which we will re- 
peat to be sure 3''ou understand. 
Have the squares of cloth for 
all the drawings sufficiently 
large to be easily manipulated. 
Draw the design clearly and 
distinctly. Draw it on the ex- 
act bias of the cloth ; move the 
two sides of the cloth at pre- 
cisely the same time. Move 
the cloth always with both 
hands spread out flat on top of 
the cloth. Place the cloth over 
a large piece of white paper 
that the picture may be plainly 
seen. Care should be taken 
to obtain soft cloth that will 
stretch readily. These diver- 
sions will afford fine sport for a 
quiet evening and will be en- 
joyed bv the entire family. If 
painted the designs will be still 
more comical. 




FINGER-PLAYS FOR 

LITTLE FOLKS 

CHAPTER XXIV 

OW we must play in-doors, and if 
you will spread out your little 
hands and slide them together, 
back to back, with the palms out- 
ward, so that the longest finger 
of the left hand rests on the back 
of the right hand and the longest 
finger of the right hand lies on 
the back of the left hand, you will 
have a 



Queer Little Teeter-tarter 

which will move when and how you wish. The two longest 
fingers form the teeter- tarter ; half of the teeter is on one 
side and half on the opposite side of the fence. The fence 
is made by the other parts of the hands, which, crossing 
each other, fit snugly and tightly, leaving the teeter free to 
swing back and forth at will. Fig. 461 shows how your 
hands should be placed together : the long finger marked 
A is half of the teeter ; the other half is on the opposite side- 
Move the long fingers and watch the teeter go up and 
down, first one end then the other, just like a real teeter 
made of a board across a fence. If you bend back both of 
your wrists, the right wrist will drop while the left wrist 

273 



274 



Recreation for Girls 



will be raised above it. This will bring one edge of the 
fence or hands toward you, and looking" down, you can see 
both ends of the little teeter. 




Fig. 461. — The queer little teeter. 



You might cut out of writing-paper two small dolls and 
bend them so that they will sit on the teeter. The least bit 
of paste on the bail of the teeter finger of your left hand 

and some more on the nail of the teeter 

finger of 3'our right hand 

will fix the paper children 

securely on the teeter, and 

you can make it go as fast 

as you please without dan- 
ger of the dolls' falling off. 

Fig. 462 gives the pattern 

for the dolls ; Fig. 463 

shows how to bend them, 

and Fig. 464 gives a little 

paper girl seated on one 

end of the teeter. 

Take the dollies off the 





Fig. 462. — Pattern of 
doll. 



Fig. 463. — Doll ready 
for teeter. 



Finger- Plays for Little Folks 



275 



teeter and let them rest 
for a while and watch 
you build a church. 
Place your two hands 
back to back, with the 
ends of the fingers of the 
right loosely crossing 
those of the left hand ; 
then, bring the palms of 
the hands together, fin- 
gers inside and thumbs 




outside and lo ! 



Fig. 464.— Doll on teeter. 

Here is the Church 



(Fig. 465). But it is without a steeple. Build one by rais- 
ing the two first fingers, without disturbing the remainder 
of the hands ; bring the raised 
finger-tips together and, " Here 
is the steeple " (Fig. 466). A 
church, like any other building, 




Fig. 466. — " Here is the church," 



Fig. 466. "And here is the steeple, 



276 



Rccrcatiou for Girls 




to be ot use. nuist have people in it. and if we could 
onlv look inside this building we might lind them; move 

vour thumbs apart, or " Open 
the doors and see all the people" 
(^Fig. 467). There thev are sit- 
ting in rows; don't vou see 
them? Now let the people 
go up-stairs. Crc^^s vour two 
smallest fingers on the inside, 
which will bring the backs ol 
the hands toward each other; 
keeping the little fingers to- 
gether, cross the third ifino-ers, 
next the second, then the first 

Fig. 467. -"Open the door and see all fiugerS. The fiugCrS OU the left 

"■^^ ^'°P'"-" hand form the \stairs for the 

people or fingers of the right hand \o climb. Trv it again, 
allowing the people to ascend slowlv one b\" one : " Hej'e 
are the people climbing up-stairs" 
(Fig. 46S\ Keep vour hands 
looselv in the last position and 
raise your right elbow; while 
holding that up, twist your lett 
hand around forward until the 
left thumb rests on the inside of 
the right hand. Both hands will 
now be turned downward with 
the wrists uppermost. 

Leaving the hands in this posi- 
tion, turn your two elbows out- 
ward and down, which \vill bring 

your hands up ; slide your right ^.^ ,68. --Here are the people 

thumb outside and around vour cumbing up-stairs,- 




Fmger- Plays for Little Folks 



VI 



left thumb, the left thumb will then be the minister and, 
though you cannot see them, the fingers clasped inside the 
hands are the people, but you can see the thumb, preacher, 
standing up ready to talk to the people, and you may say, 
" Here is the preacher who for 
them cares " (Fig. 469). 
If you want to form 

A Bird's Head 

of your hand, lift up the second 
finger of the left hand with your 
right hand, and cross the lifted 
finger well over the back of the 
firstfinger of the left hand. Again, 
use your right hand to lift the 
third finger of the left hand and 
twist it over the second left-hand 
finger. The last finger is the little 

one of the left hand; lap this over Fig. 469-— "Here is the preacher 
^, iz-.i-ir I -11 who for them cares." 

the left third hnger and you will 

have all the left-hand fingers crossed, one on top of the 
other. Bring the top of the left thumb up to meet the 
tip of the second left-hand finger, which will finish the 
bird's head. The head does not greatly resemble that of 
a real bird, but we will pretend it does, for the fun of 
seeing who can build the head first. 
To make a 

Man Chopping Wood, 

place the inside of the little finger of the right hand on the 
inside of the little finger of the left hand, and the inside 
of the third finger of the right hand over the inside of the 
third finger of the left hand ; then bring the second and 




278 



Recreation for Gir/s 




Fig. 470. — Preparing for man chopping wood. 



third lingers of 
the right hand 
up and over the 
inside of the 
pahii of the left 
liand, as in Fig. 
470. Rest the 
tipof the second 
finger of the 
right hand on 
the tip of the 
thiinib of the 
left hand. The 
second finger is 
the stick of 
wood. Strike 

the wood with the first linger of the left hand (C, Fig. 471); 

raising that, bring down the second linger of the left hand 

(B, Fig. 471). Keep them moving, first one, then the other, 

and you will have "the 

man chopping wood" 

(Fig. 471). It is a pity 

to waste the chips which 

always fall when wood is 

being cut, so let two 

children, the thumb and 

first finger of the right 

hand, pick them up. Do 

this by tapping the palm 

of the left hand with the 

thumb and first finger of 

the right hand, while 

the man cuts the wood. Fig. 471.— Man chopping wood. 




Finger-Plays for Little Folks 



279 



The four fingers working- at the same time make it quite 
lively, but you will find that if the man chops fast, the chil- 
dren will pick the chips very quickly, and if the man works 
slowly the children will not hurry about gathering the 
chips. It will be very difficult for you to have the man 
chop slowly when the children are eager and quick at their 
task. The feat will be almost as hard as patting your chest 
with the left hand while you rub the right hand back and 
forth over the top of your little head. You will laugh to 




Fig. 472. — "Here are my mother's knives and forks," 



see the left hand rub, when you told it to pat; the poor 
little left hand tries to mind, but just as soon as its twin 
brother, the right hand, begins rubbing, the left hand has to 
stop patting and rub too. 

Lay your two hands down showing the palms ; lace the 
fingers together and say, 

" Here Are My Mother's Knives and Forks " 

(Fig. 472). Of course, the fingers are the knives and forks. 
Turn your hands over while the fingers remain in place, 
bring the wrists down and say, " Here is my father's 
table" (Fig. 473). Raise the two first fingers, bringing their 



28o 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig. 473. — " Here is my father's table. 



tips together, and say, 
" Hei-e is my sister's 
looking-glass " (Fig. 
474). Then raise your 
two little tino'ers and, 
rocking the hands 
from side to sitle, say, 
"And here is the 
baby's cradle " (Fig. 

475)-^ 

There is another 
little fingei" game, 
which we will call 



"The Blackbirds." 

Dampen two bits of paper and press one down tight on 
the nail of the lirst hnger of your right hantl and the other 
on the nail of the hrst 
finger of your left hand. 
The two pieces of paper 
are the two blackbirds. 
Now hold yonr first 
fingers, on which the 
birds are resting, out stiff 
and double up the re- 
maining fingers; then let 
your father see how well 
you have taught these 
little pet birds to mind, 
for they will do exactly 
as you say, going and 
coming at your com- 
mand. Place the tips Ol Fig. 474. "Here is my sister's looking-glass," 




Fi7iger-Plays for Little Folks 



281 



your two first fingers on a chair, which you must pretend 
is a hill, and raising first one finger to make the bird fly, 
then the other, keep the pets flying up and down while you 
repeat these lines : 

" Two little blackbirds sitting on a hill ; 
One named Jack and the other named Jill. 
Fly away, Jack ! — " 

As you say the last line raise the right finger up and back 
over your right shoulder ; while there, quickly bend down 
the rightfingerwith 
Jack on it and stiffen 
out the second 
finger in its place. 
Bring your right 
hand down with 
Jack hidden and 
put the empty 
second finger on the 
chair instead of the 
first. The bird will 
be gone and lone- 
some little Jill will 
perch on the hill 
with no playmate, 
so you must let her 
go too. Repeat 
these words, " Flay away, Jill," and make her disappear as 
you did Jack, bringing down the empty second finger of 
your left hand and your father will find that both birds 
have gone; but you may make them return by saying, 
" Come back, Jack," as you raise your right hand and 
close down the second finger while you straighten out the 




Fig. 475. — "And here is the baby's cradle." 



282 Recreation for Girls 



first and bring it again to the cliair witii Jack upon it. 
Call Jill also that Jack may have some one t(j sing to, and 
as you say, " Come back, Jill," bend down the second finger 
and straighten out the first one with Jill on it, and let her 
fly down to Jack. You may repeat the lines again and 
again, making the pets come and go. 
You can play 

"Chin Chopper Chin" 

with your sister, but you must be careful and touch her 
face very lightly. As you say " Knock at the door," softly 
tap her forehead, and at " Peep in," gently raise the outside 
of her eyelid by pushing the top of your finger upward on 
her temple near the eye, but not too near, as you might 
accidentally strike the eye. " Lift up the latch " by slightly 
raising the tip of her nose with the end of your finger. At 
" Walk in " gently place your finger between her lips; end 
the play by saying " Chin Chopper Chin " as you lightly 
tap several times under her chin. 

Were I with you now we would play 

"Build the Tower." 

I would place my right hand down flat on my lap with the 
back of the hand uppermost, and say to you, " Lay your 
right hand out flat on top of mine ;" then I would place 
my left hand over yours, and you would cover mine with 
vour left hand. That would make four hands all piled up 
in a tower; but the moment your left hand came down on 
top of mine I would pull my right hand out from under the 
tower and lay it on top, covering your left hand ; then you 
would hurry to take your right hand from under the pile 
and place it on top. So we would continue to play, always 
drawing tlie hand out from the bottom of the pile and plac- 



Finger- Plays for Little Folks 283 



ing it on top until we were able to build the tower very 
rapidly, and, when either of us took too long a time to draw 




Fig. 476.— The famous five little pigs. 



her hand out from under the pile, a forfeit would have to 
be given to the other. 



284 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig- 477- — " This little pig 
went to market," 



Fig. 47g.— "This little pi; 
had roast beef," 



< 




> 



Fig. 478. — "This little pig 
stayed at home," 



< 





< 



Fig. 480— "This little pig 
had none," 




> 



Fig. 481.— "This little pig said 
wee, wee, all the way home." 



Finger- Plays for Little Folks 



285 



Ask your older sister or brother to trace the 

Famous Five Little Pigs 

(Figs. 477, 478, 479,480, 481) on unruled white writing-paper 
and cut them out. The strip of paper extending from one 
side of each little pig must be made into a ring (Fig. 482) 
to fit the end of one of the five fingers on your right hand 
(Fig. 476). Begin with "This little pig went to market" 
(Fig. 477) for the thumb, next, " This little pig stayed at 
home " (Fig. 478) for the first finger, then 
"This little pig had roast beef" (Fig. 479) 
for the second finger, and "This little pig 
had none " (Fig, 480) for the third finger; to 
the little finger belongs (Fig. 481) "This 
little pig said wee, wee, all the way home." 
Adjust the bands until they fit perfectly, 
then paste the end of each band under the 
free side of the attached pig. If the bands 
are too long they can be cut to proper 
length. Fig. 482 gives the wrong side of a 
pig with band curled around and pasted on 
back of pig, and Fig. 476 shows how the Five 
/ Little Pigs will look when on your fingers. If you can 
give each little pig a flat wash of pink water-color paint, 
and when dry ink the outlines, they will appear more real. 
After you have played with the wee pigs, try 




Fig. 482. — Ring of 
paper on pig. 



The Children's Heads 

(Figs. 483, 484, 485, 486, 487), and ask some one to fold 
paper into hats for your finger-heads, as shown in Figs. 488, 
489, 490, 491, 492. You might ask to have the various chil- 
dren's heads painted, giving each girl and boy different 



286 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig. 43 . -' I am sleepy." 



/Sir -<C1S JU- 





Fig. 490. — Hat for little girl who 
wants to play. 



. 487. — "I'll give you a good time." 




Fig. 491. — Laughing boy's hat 



Fig. 492. — Little girl's hat. 



Finger- Plays for Little Folks 287 

colored hair — black, brown, red, deep yellow, and pale 
yellow. If the hats are of colored tissue-paper the effect 
will be fine, especially if a bit of gay cloth be wound around 
each finger for clothing. Then the five alive little dolls can 
bow to each other and dance. 




Arranging the flowers. 



2SS 



CHAPTER XXV 




HOW TO ARRANGE 

FRESH FLOWERS 

THINK one must really love the 
flowers in order to arrange them 
perfectly. If you love them you 
will feel in sympathy with them, 
and that alone will help you to 
understand what is needed to 
bring out and emphasize their 
exquisite beauty. Yet some 
knowledge of the rules that 
govern the best arrangement of 
flowers is necessary also, for it saves many experiments 
and makes the pretty task much more enjoyable and satis- 
factory. 

You may crowd a room with the rarest and most expen- 
sive flowers, but so arrange them that more than half of the 
effect of their beauty is lost ; and you may have only one 
flower, but if it be the right kind of flower in the right kind 
of vase, and placed in just the right spot, your room will 
appear abundantly decorated and be filled with the beauty 
and sweetness o*^ the one blossom. 

In a house where good taste always prevailed there 
stood, one day, on the uncovered top of a grand piano a 
tall, colorless, transparent vase which held just one long- 
stemmed American Beauty rose. The queenly flower with 

289 



290 Recreation for Girls 

its stem showing through the glass and the few green 
leaves attached were all reflected in the highly polished 
piano, and the effect of the colors reproduced in deepened, 
darkened tones by the rich rosewood was indescribably 
lovely. There were no other flowers and, though the room 
was a large one, none were needed. One's eyes fell imme- 
diately upon the rose when entering, and lingered there 
with no wish to be drawn away by lesser attractions. 

It was not merely a happy accident that placed the 
one flower in its prominent and effective position, but the 
experience and unerring taste of the daughter of the house. 

Imagine a Number of Nasturtiums, 

with no green leaves to relieve them, packed tightly into 
the neck of a brightly colored porcelain vase, and set 
priml}^ on a stiff mantel-piece amid other prim ornaments. 
Then think of a clear glass rose-bowl standing on a table, 
where lie the newest magazines or books, filled and running 
over in riotous beauty with the same nasturtiums in their 
free, untrammelled state. The viney stems with leaf, bud, 
and blossom drooping to the table or hanging over its edge, 
and the other blossoms standing up in sweet liberty with 
room to move about if the}' will. Can you hesitate between 
the two arrangements ? Yet I found the first in a flower- 
lover's home. 

Do Not Crowd the Flowers 

Few flowers look well packed tightly together and all 
are better for loosening up a trifle. Purple violets are 
almost the only flowers that will bear crowding, though 
many think wild daisies adapted to this arrangement, and 
spoil their beaut}' by making them into hard, tight bunches. 
A good rule is to follow Nature as far as possible in this 



How to Arrange Fresh Flowers 291 

direction. Flowers that grow singly and far apart, should 
not be crowded, but those which grow thickl}^ clustered 
ma}- be more closely massed. 
It is almost always well to 

Combine Green Leaves with the Flowers 

although there are some that do not need this relief. 
Closely packed flowers should have no foliage ; chrysan- 
themums, one species of the brilliant poppy and the sweet- 
pea need none, but there are few others that do not show 
better amid green leaves. 

While ffowers of different varieties seldom look well to- 
gether, you may sometimes add much to its beauty by 
giving a flower the foliage of another plant, and a trailing 
green vine will often be just the touch needed to soften a 
stiff arrangement. 

Asparagus fern is an airy and feathery green, but you 
must use it with discretion, as it is suitable only for fragile, 
delicate flowers in very loose arrangements. Other ferns, 
though often used, do not really combine well with any 
flowers, they are too distinctly another species of plant and 
hold themselves aloof in their separateness. The wild 
oxalis, wood-sorrel, or, as the children call it, sour grass, 
has pretty delicate leaves that look well with sweet-peas 
and other small flowers. As a rule, a flower's own foliage 
suits it best, however, and you may be certain not to offend 
good taste by keeping to it. 

Do Not Combine Flowers 

that are different in kind or color, it can seldom be done 
successfull}'. To be sure, a mass of sweet-peas in all their 
variety of color is very lovely, but even they are more effec- 
tive when separated into bunches each of one color. White 



292 Recreation for Girls 

flowers sometimes are the better for a touch of color, and 
white and yellow roses make a pretty combination, or 
white and delicate pink, but the strong contrast of white and 
dark red is not i)leasing-. Lilies should always have a 
vase to themselves, and the Ascension lily must under all 
circumstances stand alone. Neither the quality of the 
flower nor the associations connected with it permit of its 
being grouped with any other. 

Vases 

In the careful arrangement of flowers your object should 
always be to bring out their whole beauty, and let all else 
be secondary to that. One vase, though beautiful in itself, 
may not be at all suitable for holding flowers, while another, 
of no value as an ornament, will display them to their best 
advantage. 

Colorless Transparent Vases 

are always safe and in many cases absolutely necessary. 
Give your roses transparent vases or bowls whenever pos- 
sible. If they have long stems, tall, slender vases, if their 
stems are short the clear glass rose-bowls are more suitable. 
Short-stemmed flowers do not look well in tall vases, and 
a flower should always stand some distance above the top 
of the vase. Someone gives as a rule that the height of 
long-stemmed flowers should be one and one-half times the 
height of the vase, but when the vase contains several, of 
course the height must vary. 

The Vases and Bowls 
need not be expensive, for they are now in the market at 
extremely low prices. Knowing what to choose you can 
find for a vcr}^ moderate sum tall, slender vases with almost 
no markings, that will show the long stem and so display the 



How to Arrange Fresh Flowers 293 



::^^^ 



entire loveliness of the rose. Fig-. 493 is one of the least 
expensive of these vases. Even the colorless glass olive- 
bottle, shaped like Fig. 494, makes a pretty and suitable 
/^-O")?; vase, and an ordinary fish-globe displays the 
rose-stems to far gix'atcr advantage than a 
cut-glass rose-bowl. A clear 
glass vvater-[jitcher without 
tracing of any kind is another 
appropriate receptacle for these 
lovely blossoms. When the 
stems of any flowers have 
beauty of their own, they 
should never be hidden in 
opaque vases. So it is not for 
roses alone these transparent 
vases are suitable. 



Colored Vases and Jars 

will sometimes enhance the 
brilliancy of flowers of con- 
trasting- or complementary col- 
ors. A pale-yellow jar will 
intensify the richness of the 
purple of the violet, and a soft 
g-reen will harmonize with it 



Fig. 494. — The olive 
bottle. 



Fi&-493-— An in- b 

expensive clear most delightfully. Thc ncu- 

glass vase. ' 

tral gray often found in Japan- 
ese ware will not clash with any color, and is especially 
suited to brilliant red flowers ; yellow flowers in a dark-blue 
jar are quite effective. 

Do not use ornate or highly decorated vases. No de- 
sign should conflict with the natural flowers, and the shape 
of the vase should also be simple. 



294 



Recreation for Girls 



Cvlinclrical jais, like Fig. 495, are suited Xo heavy cluster- 
ing flowers like the lilac and also to the large chrysau- 
theniums. I'ig. 4Qr) is another good 
shape ; but avoid 
vases like Fig. 497 
with a neck so 
small it will admit 
onlv one or two 
stems, while the 
bowl is much too 
large for the lew 
flowers standing 
stiffly erect. 

Place short- 
stemmed flowers, 
like the pans)' and 
violet, in low jars 
or bowls, and it 
is not necessarv 





Fig. 495. — A cylindrical jar 
-7 



496. — Another 
shape. 




Fig. 497. — Avoid vases 
like this. 



to have them lie flat on the water. A 
friend of mine has invented lor her 
own use this little 

Flower Lifter 

which holds the flowers above the water 
while allowing nearly' the whole of their 
short stems to be immersed. 

With an old pair of shears, or a 
wire-cutter, snip off a dozen or more 
pieces of copper wire of var3nng lengths 
between ten inches for the longest and 
five for the shortest piece. At each 
end of every wire make a loop like 



How to Arrange Fresh Flowers 295 




Fig. 498; bend the loops over (Fig. 499), then 
fasten all the pieces to a brass curtain-ring by 
twisting each piece once around the ring at 
the centre of the wire (Fig. 500). Bunch the 
wires together and stand the lifter in a bowl of 
water; put your ffower-stems thi'ough the wire 
loops, as in Fig. 501, and the wires 
under water will look like the flower- 
stems, the loops being hidden by the 
blossoms. 

Symmetry 

is pleasing and necessary in many 
things, but not in the grouping of 
flowers. You must strive for ap- 
parent carelessness in effect while 
taking the utmost care, and for ir- 
regularity and naturalness rather 
than stiff, formal arrangement. A 
bowl of flowers need not look, as 
it sometimes does, like a dish for 
the table, served with the confec- 
tioner's symmetrical decorations; it 
should rather seem as if the sweet 
blossoms were growing in a bed of 
their own. 

If you can take 

Wild Flowers 

up in a clump, roots and all ; they 
will look far better than the cut 
Fig. 498.— At flowers arranged in vases, and the 




each end of the j-^^^^-g ^-^^^ aftcrward be planted in 

wire make a. J -t 

\:'op. your wild-flower garden. 



(ft 



Fig. 499.— Bend 
the loops over. 



296 



Recreation for Girls 



Bloodroot will keep a long while if the roots are not 
disturbed, and one of the loveliest flower-pieces we ever 




Fig. 500. — Fasten the pieces to a brass curtain-ring. 

had in the house was a gray-green Japanese bowl filled 
with the growing bloodroot. The blossoms stand closely 
together and a small bowl will hold quite a number. 




Fig. 501. — Put the flower stems through the wire loops. 

Wood anemones, hepaticas, and wild violets are all 
adapted to this temporary transplanting. I have kept ferns 



How to Arrmtge Fresh Flowers 297 

in this way for several weeks and the centre-piece for the 
table in our mountain camp was at one time a clump of 
maiden-hair fern in a small china bowl, which lasted fresh 
and perfect many days. As there can be comparatively 
little soil with the roots of these wild fiowers, they must 
be kept very damp all the while, and ferns, especially, will 
do best when set in a pan or bowl of water. 



CHAPTER XXVI 



OPEN-AIR PLAYHOUSES 




many places in the South 
the children have most 
beautiful material with 
which to build out-of- 
door playhouses. Large 
green palm-leaves grow 
close to the ground and 
point their slender fin- 
gers out in many direc- 
tions as though holding 
up their outstretched hands, asking the girls and boys to 
come and take them. These palms, together with small, 
full-leaved live-oak twigs, Cherokee roses, trailing vines, 
and long gray moss, are fashioned into bouquets and tied 
in great bunches to the trees with strings made of strips 
of palms. Four trees growing near together are usually 
selected as the boundar}^ lines of the 

Florida Playhouse, 

their branches overhead servinof as a roof. The walls are 
open, allowing a free passage of air and plenty of light (Fig. 
502). 

Similar playhouses may be built by children in an)'- spot 
where trees grow within a short distance of each other. In 
place of tropical decorations the young builders can use the 

298 



Open-Air PlayJiouses 



299 



most ornamental bouquets within reach, selecting foliage 
and flowers which will keep fresh at least for a few hours. 
If trees are not available, make the open-air 

Playhouse of a Large Umbrella. 

Tie a strong piece of twine securely to the end of each of 
the ribs and tie the loose end of each piece of twine around 



r '^iD:f --' #1 ^v4Fi^.. 



;i_>^-W!5:.' -^ "^ ^^ 5.^ ^m^^^^l^ 



O V 







Fig 502. — Florida playhouse. 

the notch cut in a pointed wooden peg a short distance from 
its top. This will give an umbrella with a fringe of dan- 
gling pegs. Open the umbrella and fasten the handle se- 
curely to a long, sharp-pointed stick, binding the two to- 
gether with strong twine. First run one end of the twine 
down the length yov\ intend binding, allowing enougli to tie 



300 



Recreation for Girls 



at the bottom ; then commence binding at the top over all 
three — the umbrella handle, the twine, and the stick. Wind 
the string around very tight, and when you reach the bot- 
tom, tie the twine you hold to the loose end of the length 
under the wrappings. Examine carefully and be sure the 
handle does not slide or twist on the stick ; then push 




Fig. 503. — Framework for umbrella playhouse. 



the point of the stick down into the ground at the place 
decided upon for the playhouse. If you are not strong 
enough to erect the house by yourself, ask some compan- 
ions to lend a hand and help sink the stick firmly in the 
earth. When this is accomplished stretch out each length 
of twine in turn and drive the peg in the ground (Fig. 503). 
You will need a wide ruffle on the edge of the umbrella 
of some kind of material full enough to reach around the 



Opeti-Air Playhouses 



301 



outer circle of pegs on the ground beneath its lower edge. 
The stretched twine will hold the ruffle out, forming an 
odd little playhouse with a smooth, round roof and drapery 




Fig. 504. — Umbrella playhouse. 

walls. Plait the ruffle and pin it on the umbrella with safety- 
pins; also fasten it at the bottom to each peg (Fig. 504). 
Newspapers pasted together and made of double thickness 
may be used for the ruffle, if more convenient, but be 
careful in handling the paper, as it tears readily. The 



o 



02 



KccrcafioN for G/Ws 



loni;'cr the pole the higher and larger will be V(^ur lunise, 
for the strings also nuist be longer. 

When vou want to plav Indian and i)retend vou live in 
the Wild West, vi)nr luMiie nuist be 

A Wigwam 

Get a dozen slender poles abont as large aronnd as a 
broom-stiek. and twice and one-half as tall as yourself. Tic 
three poles secui'cK' t(\i;'ether nc-ar tlie tops and stack the 
others around the lirst three as a foundation or trainework 
foi- the house. Settle each [-tole tirinlv in the ground, form- 




Fig. 505. — Frame for wigwam. 

ing a circle, and bring the tops together at the centre, 
where each pi^le shoidd torm a support for the others, and 
all slundd lean ai^ainst and across each other; then bind 



Opeii-Air Playhouses 



303 



all the poles together at the top of the framework (Fig. 
505). Covers of real wigwams are usually cut to fit 
the framework and often decorated in savage fashion. 
Sometimes they are composed of skins of wild beasts. If 
you can make yours in Indian 
style, it will be very realistic 
and lots of fun. Find some in- 
expensive dull-brown or gray 
outing cloth or Canton flannel 
and sew several lengths to- 
gether. Fig. 506 gives the 
pattern of a wigwam cover- 
ing, and the dotted lines en- 
closing B-B-B-B show how 
the breadths are sewed to- 
gether. C is the chimney- 
opening where the poles come 
through at the top. O is one 
of the flaps held back with an 
extra pole; D, one of the lower 
front sides folded over for the 
door-way. The dotted line K 
indicates the slit to be cut 
for the chimney-flap. . The two 
chimney-flaps can be brought together for protection when 
necessary. Along the curved edge of the blank side of the 
diagram (Fig. 506) holes are shown for the wooden stakes to 
be used in pinning the wigwam to the ground. The holes 
must be continued alono[- the entire eds^e of the coverinof. 




Fig. 506. — Cover for playhouse wig- 
wam. 



Cut Your Wigwam 

similar to diagram (Fig. 506), making an immense cape-like 
affair. Tr}' the covering over the framework of poles; if it 



304 



Recreation for Girls 



fits fairly well, hem the raw edges and bind the small, round 
holes cut at intervals in the lower edge, to prevent them 
from tearing. When finished tie each of the two top points 
to a separate pole. Ask someone to assist you and let the 
two poles be raised at the same time to the top of the wig- 




Fig- 507- — Your wigwam playhouse. 

warn framework; in this way the entire upper part of the 
covering may be hoisted in place ; then the sides can be 
spread out and adjusted. Indians, having no chimneys, 
always leave quite a large opening at the top of their 
wigwams to serve this purpose ; the space also admits 
light into their houses. Commence near the top at the 



Ope7i-Air Playhouses 



305 



place where the flaps are cut, and pin the fronts to- 
gether with large thorns or sharp-pointed slender sticks. 
Fasten the fronts to within a few feet of the ground. The 
opening left at the bottom takes the place of a door. 
Sharpen as many wooden pegs as there are holes in the 
bottom of the covering and push a peg through each 
hole into the ground, bending the pegs outward a little 




Fig. 508. — African hut playhouse. 



in order to keep the tent-like covering from slipping off 
the tops of the pegs. The two poles attached to the 
chimney points must now be carried backward on each 
side of the wigwam, to be brought forward again when 
desired (Fig. 507). When other material is lacking, shawls, 
bedspreads, or sheets pinned together may be used for 
your wigwam-cover. 

With a large-sized Japanese umbrella, a breadth of 
cloth, a stick, and some straw you can make an 



o 



06 



Recreation for Girls 



African Hut 

Take the straw or hay and divide some of it into bunches 
twelve inches in lens^th. Tie these all tooether in a lone: 



M. 



L 




Fig. 510. — Framework ready for floral tent. 

row, forming a straw fringe. Sew the 
fringe around the edge of the umbrel- 
la with a coarse 





Fig. 509. — Bind- 
ing branch on 
forked stick. 



needleand thread, 

allowing it to hang over and down. 
Overlap the first row with another 
straw fringe and continue to sew on 
row after row until the top is reached 
and the umbrella entirely covered ; 
then fasten the handle securely to 
a sharp-pointed stick and plant it 
firmly in the ground. Measure the 
distance around the outer edge of 
the umbrella, not including the straw 
thatch, and cut the cloth long enough 
Building the ^ reach around, leaving an open space 

floral tent ' i=> r r 

playhouse. for the door-way. Use more straw to 



Fig. 511- 



open- Air Playhouses 



?P1 



cover the cloth completely and sew the straw on in over- 
lapping layers lengthwise of the material. With safety-pins 
fasten the wall around the inner edge of the umbrella, pin- 
ning the cloth to little loops of tape you have tied at inter- 
vals over the ribs of the umbrella (Fig. 508). 
The 

Floral Tent 

is easy to erect. Push two forked sticks into the ground 
and on one bind an upright slender branch (Fig. 509) ; then 




Fig. 512. — Floral tent playhouse. 

lay a pole across from one crotch to another (Figs. 510 and 
51 1). On the upright branch tie flowers and grasses, twist- 
ing a wreath of the same around the forked stick. Procure 
some bright-colored flowered material, or cloth of any kind 
and hang it over the central pole. Stretch out the four 
corners and peg them to the ground (Fig. 512). 



CHAPTER XXVII 




KEEPING STORE 



HE best place for keeping store is out- 
of-doors, where there will be plenty of 
room and no fear of disturbing the 
grown people. Select a shadj spot 
by the side of a house, fence, or tree, 
carry your supplies there and set up 
the store. 

Build the Counter 



by placing a board across from one 
empty barrel to another (Fig. 513). Turn the barrels upside 
down, bringing the covered side uppermost that there may 
be no possibility of losing articles down through the open bar- 
rel heads. Large, 
strong wooden 
boxes or two chairs 
may serve to sup- 
port the ends of the 
counter if barrels 
are not at hand. 

On each end of 
the counter nail an 

empty wooden box. Stand the box on one end and let the 
open part face backward ; put your hand inside and drive a 
few nails through box and counter to fasten the box securely 

':ioS 





Fig. 513.— The counter for your store. 



Keeping Store 



309 



in place. Do the same with the second box and your counter 
will be ready for 

The Scales. 

These are ver}' necessar}^ in weighing different articles. 
They can be made of the round covers of two large-sized 
baking-powder or cracker cans (Fig. 514). Have the covers 




Fig. 514. — Tin cover for 
scale. 




Fig. 515. — Tin cover 
pierced with three 
holes. 




Fig. 516. — Band for 
measuring holes. 



exactly the same size, and punch three holes in the rim of 
each at equal distances apart (Fig. 5 1 5). To obtain the exact 
measurements for placing the holes, take a strip of paper 
and wrap it smoothly and tightly around the outside of the 
rim of the cover. Let the paper be a trifle 
narrower than the rim of the lid, and be sure 
to fold over the long end exactly where it 
meets the first end (Fig. 516, 
A), Remove the paper, cut 
off the fold, and again \xy the 
strip on the cover. See that 
the measurement is perfectly 
Fig- 5i7--Foided paper corrcct, thcu take thc paper 

for measuring. ^^ ^^^ ^^-^^ -^ .^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ 

sections, making two folds and two ends (Fig. 

517), and for the third time wrap the strip of 

paper around the cover rim. Mark the tin at Fig. sis.-strings 

the point where the ends meet, and where the 





3IO 



Recreation for Girls 




two creases in the paper strike the tin ; this will give three 
marks on the rim equall}^ distant from each other. Drive a 

wire nail through 
the tin rim at the 
three marked places 
to make the neces- 
sary holes (Fig. 515); 
then tie knots in the 
ends of six pieces 
of string of equal 
length, and thread a 
string through each 

Fig. sig.-Scales of tin can lids. ^f ^j^^ ^j^^.^^ j^^j^g -^^ 

each of the lids. Fasten the three strings on each lid to- 
gether at the top (Fig. 518). Cut a notch at each end of a 
stick and tie the scales in place (Fig.. 519). 
Make two notches in the centre of the stick, 
one on the top, the other on the bottom, and 
tie a string around the stick at the centre 
notches by which to suspend the scales. 
This centre string may be fastened to an 
overhanging tree-branch, or you can make a 
support for it. Nail an upright stick to the 
end of the counter and box, allowing it to 
come a little below the board ; then nail 
another upright stick in the same way to the 
other end of the counter. Notch the tops of 
the uprights, lay a long, slender stick across 
from one to the other and tie the centre string 
of the scales on the cross-stick (Fig. 520). 
Fig. 521 gives an end view and shows exactly Fig. sai.— Naii up- 
how to nail the upright on the box and end of "^!^' °" ''°;; \"'* 

i^ "^ end of board this 

board. Use different-sized stones as weights; way. 



•*s~? 




« ; -< ---v'- Y if 




Fig. 520.— Take your place behind the counter and keep store. 



3" 



o 



12 



Recreation for Girls 



a small one for a quarter of a pound, one twice as large 
for a half pound, and another twice the size of the last for 
a whole pound. 

Find a number of empty boxes in which to keep 

Your Supplies, 

and stand them in a row on another counter back of the 
first (Fig. 522). Fill each box a little more than half full of 
sand, earth, pebbles, or dried leaves, which 3-ou must pretend 
is flour, sugar, coffee, tea, or other things in stock. Find a 
large shell, a piece of shingle, or anything else that will an- 
swer the purpose, for a scoop to use in handling many of the 
groceries. Label each box with the name of the article you 

intend it to contain ; 

.] \ I ^ then look up your 

vegetables and nuts. 
Acorns make fine 
n u t s. G a t h e r a 
quantity of them, 
and for cabbage tie 
a number of corn- 
husks together, or 
grape-vine or holly- 
hock leaves ; any kind of large leaves will answer the pur- 
pose. Take a small, short stick and with a string wind the 
ends of the leaves, one leaf at a time, on the stick, folding 
the first leaf opposite to and inside the second, the second 
in the third, and so on, always allowing each succeeding 
leaf to overlap the last until the cabbage-head is large 
enough ; the resemblance to the real cabbage will be re- 
markable. Spinach may be made of small leaves. For 
asparagus pick a number of long, slender seed stems of the 
plantain. Short, slender sticks placed in a glass jar may 




Fig. 522. — Supplies for your store. 



Keeping Store 



313 



serve as sticks of cand}^ licorice, or licorice root. You can 
utilize various grasses, leaves, roots, and seeds in many 
ways. 

When selling- groceries you will need 

Wrapping Paper 

in which the customers may carry awa}' their goods. Cut 
newspaper into uniform sheets of two or three sizes and 
lay them conveniently near for use. String Avill not be 
necessary if you twist the paper into cornu- 
copias. Hold the lower right-hand corner 
of a sheet of paper with your right hand 
and the other lower corner on the same edge 
with your left hand ; pull the corner in your 
right hand forward, continue to bring it tow- 
ard you until it stretches out and up from 
the corner in your left hand and covers well 
within the upper corner diagonally from it. 
Hold these two corners together with the 
right hand while with the left you roll the 
bottom corner, held in that hand, outside, 
forming the lower point of the cornucopia. 
Fold up the bottom point to keep the cornu- 
copia from unrolling (Fig. 523), and it will be ready for 
whatever it is to hold. The top point, B, can be turned 
down as a cover. 

Flower-pots or tin cans, large and small, may serve for 
pint and quart measures. Always give generous measure 
and full iveight when selling your supplies. This item is 
very important ; remember it every time you make a sale, 
for the act will help to build up true ideas of justice and 
honesty. 

Now make 




Fig. 523. — News- 
paper cornucopia. 



314 



Recreation for Girls 



The Money 

necessary to use in the store. Take ordinary white writing- 
paper not too heavy and kiy it over a coin ; hold the paper 
down securely with the thumb and hrst finger of your left 
hand while you rub an old spoon or smooth metal of some 
kind over and over the paper-covered coin. The metal end 
of the handle of a penknife is convenient to use for this pur- 
pose. After one or two rubs you will see indications of the 
print of the coin ; a few more rubs will bring out the lines 
distinctly. Make as many coins as you will need, of differ- 
ent denominations. Money of any country may be coined 
in this manner. 

After printing all money necessary, cut it out ready for 
use and put the change into 

Paper Pocket-books. 



It requires only a few moments to 
make them. Cut a piece of smooth 
paper eleven and one-half inches long 
and seven wide (Fig. 524). Fold down 
diagonally the two top corners until 
they meet (Fig. 525) ; fold the other two 
corners in the same way (Fig. 526). 
Fold the top point down to meet centre 
of folded edge (Fig. 527); do likewise 
with the bottom point (Fig. 528), Turn 
the top over and fold to centre (Fig. 
529) ; bring the bottom up to meet the 
edge of the folded top (Fig. 530). Now 
foUl back and under one of the sides (Fig. 531), fold under 
the other side (Fig. 532), and bend back lengthwise through 



!*''£• 524 —Paper for your 
pocket-book. 



Keeping Store 



315 





Fig. 525. — Fold down the two top 
corners until they meet. 



Fig. 526.— Fold the other two cor- 
ners in the same way. 



the centre until top and bottom meet (Fig-. 533). Lay the 
pocket-book down on one side and the lower part will 
resemble Fig. 534. The lower portion of the sides O and P, 





Fig. 527.— Fold top point to meet 
centre of folded edge. 



Fig. 528. — Fold bottom point to meet 
centre of folded edge. 



Fig. 534, must be fastened together that the bottom may be 
tight and secure. Cut a strip of paper a trifie shorter than 



,i6 



Rccrcafioii for Girls 





the length of (Fig. 534). and insert it at 
the bottom bv first folding the strip 
through the centre lengthwise, then 
sliding one edge in at O and the other 
in at P. Push the two sides of the 
strip well \\\^ in 
the p(~)cket-book, 

Fig. 529^-Turn the top over j j [^^ttom 

and fold to centre 

will be t i g h 1 1 v 
bound (Fig. 535). Turn the pocket-book 
right side up, and you will find two Fig. 530.— Bring the bottom 

r i'i.i.1 1 up to meet edge of folded top. 

nice, firm little pock- ^ ^ 

ets. Slip your finger in one pocket and 
pull out the point to serve as a cover 
(Fig. 536). Cut a short slit through one 
layer of the front of the pocket-book for 
securing the point of the cover when the 
pocket-book is closed (Fig. 537). 
Divide the money among those taking part in the sport; 
then 

Take Your Place Behind the Counter 

and let your little friends call and purchase whatever they 
choose. 

Be careful in making change that there are no mistakes, 
and insist that each customer count the money received 
in change before leaving the store. If you wish to be very 
business-like, take account of all goods sold. Write down 
the articles with the measure or weight and the price 
received, as nearly as possible as accounts are kept in 
real stores. Should customers keep 3^ou too busy to put 
down the items yourself, let another person act as book- 
keeper and cashier, and when 3'ou make a sale call out to 




Fig. 531. —Fold back and 
under one of the sides. 



Keeping Store 



317 




iimiiwuiiiiMHi in 
532. — Fold under the other 
side. 



your assistant the item with amount 
sold and money received ; for in- 
stance, should a boy purchase a 
pound of sugar, call to the book- 
keeper: "One pound of sugar, ten 
cents ; " then turn your attention to 
the next customer while your com- 
rade writes 
down the 
amount. If 
the weather 
continues 




Fig. 533. — Bend backward until 
top and bottom meet. 



fine, you can leave your store 
undisturbed for sevei'al days in 
succession and conduct it after 
school hours. 

If you find that you need more and a greater 

Variety of Candy- 
manufacture it of strips of bright-colored paper rolled into 
the form of paper lighters about the length and thickness 
of ordinary stick candy. These mingled together in a sepa- 
rate glass jar or piled upon the 
counter add to the attractiveness of 
the store. Hard lump candy of vari- 
ous-sized pebbles will probably sell 
well, but if upon trial the demand is 
not as great as desired, you might 
wrap each pebble in a bit of .bright 
paper to enhance its appearance ; 
then the customers will doubtless 
invest more liberally in the gay-colored sweetmeats. Small 
candy balls, red and white, ma}' be made of the red and 




Fig. 534. — Showing under part 
of pocket-book. 



3i8 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig- 535.— Bottom of pocket- 
book tightly bound. 



white clover-heads picked close to 
tlic blossom, leaving no sign of the 
green stem visible. Keep the differ- 
ent colors separate, placing all of 
the red clover candy fllat down in 
one layer on the inside of a box-lid, 
where it will look bright and 

pretty. The upturned edges of the 

lid prevent the clover from rolling 

out. White-c lover candy will 

appear to better advantage if you 

place a piece of colored tissue-paper 

in a box-lid, allowing the edges of 

the paper to stand up a trifle beyond 

the sides before arranging the 

white clover in the lid. Gather a va- 
riety of grasses, roots, and leaves, 

tie them up in little bunches with 

strings formed of several pieces of 

long grass twisted or braided to- 
gether, and sell them as soup-sea- 
soning herbs. Large bouquets of 
white clover-blossoms with long 
stems and no leaves when bunched 
together, forming a white mass on 
the top, and then surrounded by 
large green leaves tied in place with 

braided grass, make excellent imitations of cauliflowers. 

Use the round, flat hollyhock-seed for crackers ; peel off 

the outside green cover and the crackers will be white. 

You can pretend large-sized poppy-seed vessels are green 

tomatoes, which 3'our customers will be glad to buy for 

making pickles. Have everything connected with your 




I'ig. 536. — Pointed cover of 
pocket-book. 




Fig. 537. — Pocket-book closed. 



Keeping Store 319 



store neat and orderly, and conduct it in a business-like 
manner. 

Do not forget to make bars of soap of moist clay or 
earth. Have the clay only soft enough to mould and cut 
with an old knife ; when of the right consistency form the 
cakes, making them all the same size. Cut the edges smooth 
and even and lay the soap on a board in the sun to harden 
sufficiently to handle with ease. 

You might also use moist clay for butter, and cut off 
portions as customers call for it, weighing the butter in your 
scales to obtain the exact quantity desired by each pur- 
chaser. Now try and think of other supplies you can make 
of the moist clay. 



CHAPTER XXVIII 
A FROLIC WITH THE ROSES 

ELECT one rose from the many you 
ive gathered and hold the blossom 
tenderly while you look down into 
its heart and breathe in its beauty 
and fragrance ; then gently turn 
the rose over and find how won- 
derfully all the petals fit in and 
are held together in their pretty 
green cup with its long green 
streamers, which we call the 
calyx. Is there any fiower more 
beautiful? See how daintily it 
is formed, how exquisite the 
coloring and how wonderful the texture! Could a manu- 
facturer furnish you with such enchanting material from 
which to make your toys? 




Boats of Rose Petals 

Carefully detach the rose petals one by one, beginning 
with the outermost and largest. Be cautious not to bruise 
or injure the fragile little things. Cut the sail and mast all 
in one piece from tissue-paper (Fig. 538). Fold the mast 
over twice, according to the dotted lines, that it may be 
stiff and able to stand erect. Bend the lower portion of the 
mast as in Fig. 539. Paste the inner sides of the fold to- 
gether, and it will form a flat piece extending out on each 

320 



A Frolic With the Roses 



321 



side of the mast (Fig. 540). Over the bottom of this spread 
the least bit of strong paste or glue and place the mast well 
forward on one of the largest rose petals. The portion of 
the petal which grew inside the calyx forms the front part 
or bow of the boat. Have the mast stand perfectly erect ; 
if it is inclined to bend toward either side, straighten it and 
keep it upright. Before launching the vessel allow a few 
moments for the glue to dry, then lift the boat very care- 





Fig. 538. — Tissue-paper sail 
and mast cut in one piece. 



Fig. 539-- 



-Bend lower portion 
of mast. 



fully by the top of the mast with your thumb and first fin- 
ger and set it down on the water, which must be without 
even a ripple. When once the boat is well launched the 
waves may come with slight risk of damage to the craft. 

Let the first boat be of a large pink rose petal and have 
its sail of the same color. 



Make Two Vessels 

of white rose petals with white sails and join the boats with 
a strip of white tissue-paper. Paste one end of the paper 



322 



Recreation for Girls 



strip on the inner part of the right-hand side of one boat 
and fasten the other end of the paper strip on the inner 
part of the left-hand side of the other boat, allowing suffi- 
cient space between the two boats to keep them from 
touching. The twins will then sail together like two beau- 
tiful white sea-gulls floating on the crest of a wave. 

Take one of the green leaves and fasten on it a green 
sail different in shape from the white (Fig. 541). Place this 
boat with the other pretty craft on the miniature lake 





Fig. 540. — Form a flat stand. 



Fig. 541 — Green tissue-paper 
sail and mast. 



in the large glass dish or basin. Though not so fragile 
and delicate, the green bark is charming. Agitate and 
move the water as the boats lie at anchor, and watch the 
effect. Drifting, floating, and dancing, the fleet of tiny 
boats will begin to move : the mingling of the different 
tints and colors, the various beautiful reflections cast in 
the clear water by the little vessels with their spreading 
sails, form a delightful fairy-like spectacle. Fig. 542 gives 
only a faint idea of the actual scene, which is all color, life, 
fragrance, and beauty. 



A Frolic With the Roses 



323 



When you keep the daint}' fleet on the water in-doors, 
it ought to remain in good condition for several days. If 
you wish to have the 

Lake in the Open Air, 

dig a hole in the ground sufficiently large and deep to hold 
the pan you intend to use as a lake. Sink the tin in the 




Fig- 542 — Fairy fleet of rose-petal boats. 

hole, fit it in perfectly steady and firm, then pour clear 
water into the pan, and when it is quiet launch the fleet. 
You will need a little 

Rose Girl 

like Fig. 544, to help you enjoy the boats, a girl who can 
stand by the water and watch the sailing-vessels ; you can 



324 



Recreation for Girls 



make such a one of a rose turned upside down. Choose the 
largest and most fully blown rose for the rose girl. Cut 
the stem off about two inches from the blossom, and push a 
common wooden toothpick through the stem midway be- 
tween the rose and the 
end of the stem. The 
toothpick forms the girl's 
two arms (Fig. 543). 

Fashion the head from 
an old seed-vessel, which 
you will probably find still 
clinging to one of the rose- 
bushes. First make a small 
hole quite deep in the top 
of the seed-vessel; then 
push the end of the stem 
of the rose up into the 
head (Fig. 543). Run each 
toothpick arm through a 
green leaf and use a white 
or pale-pink rose petal for 
the girl's face (Fig. 544). 
Pin the petal to the head 
with four rose thorns, 
using two for the eyes, 
one for the nose, and one 
for the mouth. Pin a rose 
petal on the top of the head for a hat. Turn backward 
two petals, without breaking them from the rose, to form 
the dress waist ; pin or gum one petal to the arms and neck 
in front and the other to the arms and neck at the back. 
Then stick three wooden toothpicks in the top of the rose 
(Fig. 544) ; place the toothpicks so they will form a tripod, 




Fig- 543- — How to make the rose girl. 



A Frolic With the Roses 



325 



two on a line across the front and the third a trifle back of 
and midway between the front ones. These three tooth- 
picks will enable the rose girl to stand alone ; the two fore- 
most serve as legs and the other as a support. You can 




Fig. 544. — The wide-awake rose girl. 

make feet of two green leaves stuck on the ends of the two 
front toothpicks (Fig. 544). 

Perhaps the little rose girl would like 

A Garden 

of her own, enclosed by a fence made of green leaves, 
thorns, short slender sticks and a pliable rose stem. Bend 



326 



Recreation for Girls 



the stem into an arch 
and pin it down to a 
board with ordinary pins, 
each end over a green 
leaf (Fig. 545). Begin 
at the bottom and attach 
the leaves to the arch 
with thorns, allowing all 
leaves to point iipwaiTl. 
Decorate one side, then 
begin again at the bot- 
tom and fasten leaves on 
the other side ; finish the 





Fig. 546. — The rose-girl's garden fence. 



arch by pinning a leaf upright in 
the centre. Build the fence of 
green leaves pinned together 
ir sides with slender 
:ks or broom straws ; 
stand the fence up- 
right in a cir- 
cular form, and 
fasten one end 
leaf on each 
side of the 
arch (Fig. 546). 
Of course 
you must 

Give the Rose 
Girl a Party ; 

you might call 
it "The Feast 



A Frolic With the Roses 



327 



of Roses," and decorate the four corners of a wee table with 
vases which would rival in color and beauty the famous 
" Peachblow Vase" for which such a 
fabulous price was paid. Make the 
little vases of large pink rosebuds ; 
those beginning to unfold are the best. 
Peel off the outside petals and, grasp- 
ing each bud, in turn, near its base with 
the thumb and first two fingers, gently 
work it back and forth until it is loos- 
ened and can be removed entire with- 
out damage. Stand each vase on a 
level surface and gather spears of grass 
to place in them. Push some of the 
grass ends down into the vases, but do 
not crowd them ; have only two or three 
in each vase (Fig. 547). The pink color 
of the vase will contrast pleasingly with 
the green of the grass, and the feast will 
be laden with the delicate perfume of 
roses. You might candy different col- 
ored rose petals by dipping them in 
hot sugar syrup boiled until it spins 
like a thread, and then drying the petals separately on 
oiled paper; they will be appropriate for the party. 

. In addition to these things the rose girl must have a 
little 

Pet Turtle 

to take out walking in her garden. Cut a green leaf of a 
rose like Fig. 548. Cover the top with a rose petal gummed 
on around its edges, and the turtle will be ready for a stroll 
(Fig. 549). 

Draw a face with ink on 3'our linger, and make a 




Fig. 547. — Peachblow 
vase of rosebud. 



328 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig. 548. — Green rose-leaf for part of turtle. 



Fig- 549- — Rose petal and green leaf 
turtle. 



Rose-petal Cap 

for the finger-head by lapping two petals over each other, 
leaving the outer edges for the sides and bottom of the cap. 
Gum one petal upon the other and 
put the cap on your finger (Fig. 550). 
We have not enough rose petals 
to serve for a shower, as had a Roman 
emperor long ago when he made 
bushels of them rain down upon his 
guests from the ceiling of his ban- 
quet-hall, but we can collect sufficient 

Rose Petals to Use in Painting 

some pretty designs. You will need 
neither paints nor brushes, for the 

Fig. 550. — Rose-petal cap for 
finger-head. 






Fig. 551. — Two cream-colored rose- 
petals for part of pansy. 



Fig. 552. — Pink rose petals partially 
over light ones. 



A Frolic With the Roses 



329 





Fig. 553. — Pansy ready for last rose 
petal. 



Fig. 554. — Pansy ready for green 
leaves. 



roses are the colors and deft little fingers the brushes. 
You must take the paints as you find them and work 
this way : Place two cream-colored petals 
on a smooth blank paper laid over a flat 
surface (Fig. 551); arrange two pink petals 
partially over the light ones (Fig. 552) ; lay 
down a stem from which you have taken 
the thorns (Fig. 553) ; add to the flower a 
fifth petal, which should be pink, and you 
will have painted a pansy (Fig. 554). Cut 
two of the green leaves of the rose accord- 
ing to Fig. 555, and place them as if grow- 
ing at different distances on opposite sides ^'^^■^^^^^^■"^f^"^-*^ 
of the stem (Fig. 556). Glue or strong paste from rose leaf. 




Recreation for Girls 



dropped sparingly on 
the paper where you 
intend to put the centre 
of the flower will hold 
the petals in position, 
and, if necessary, you 
may use a trifle more 
glue as the work pro- 
ceeds. 

Rose butterflies do 
not look exactly like 
real ones, but they are 
very pretty, and you 
can readily paint one. 
Arrange two large red 
rose petals for the front 
wings (Fig. 557); slight- 
ly over-lapping the low- 
er edges of these lay two 
smaller white petals, and make the body of a green leaf cut 
like Fig. 558. Gum it down over the lengthwise centre of 
the group of petals. 

Conventional Designs 

are very easy to paint. Take 
the rose calyx, cut off its 
lower half and place the 
calyx flat down on smooth 
blank white paper ; it re- 
sembles a five-pointed star. 




Fig. 556. 



-Painting of pansy made with rose 
petals. 




Fig. 557. — Red rose-petal wings and green 
rose-leaf body. 



r- 

Fig. 558. — Body of 
butterfly. 



A Frolic IVith the Roses 



331 




Fig. 559. — Conventional design painted with roses. 

Under the tip of each point slide the inner 
end of a rose petal, any color yow choose. 
Between each two rose petals gum a green 
leaf (Fig. 559). Now take away the star 
centre and use rose petals in its place, and 
you will have a " rose window " design. Ti"y 
alternating red and dark-red velvet petals, 
or use all 3'ellow petals. In this way you 
ma}^ form a variety of patterns painted with 
roses. 

To make 

Dainty Wreaths of Rose Petals, 

pin them together in a long row witli slen- Fi&- seo^Rose petals 

■1 ■-' '^ pinned together for 

der sticks or broom straws (Fig. 560). You wreath. 




332 



Recreation for Girls 



can weave larger and more substantial wreaths, strong 
enough to place on your mother's head when crowning 
her '* Queen of Beauty and Kindness." Use the entire 
blossom mingled with buds and green leaves, all short 
stemmed, not longer than three or four inches. Bind the 
stems with string on a circle made of a piece of willow 
or some other pliable material, and be sure to remove the 
thorns from all the stems before weaving the wreath (Fig- 
561). 

Try to find some new beauty in every rose you see this 
summer. Write it all down, and the following June you 
will discover still other beauties to jot in your rose book. 




Fig. 561. — ^Wreath of roses. 



CHAPTER XXIX 



A STRAW-RIDE PICNIC 




HERE is a charm in the very word 
picnic, for it brings with it a breezy, 
wholesome, out-of-door atmosphere, 
quickening the pulse and causing 
the lips to smile with delight and 
the eyes to sparkle with merri- 
ment. A genuine American pic- 
nic means a jolly little party in 
the open air with plenty of space 
for all sorts of games and amusements; and then the din- 
ner ! Its equal could not be enjoyed in an ordinary dining- 
room. There is no need of chairs when the party is 
gathered around the feast, for the novelty and fascination 
of sitting on the ground while dining are thoroughly en- 
joyed, and everyone knows how delicious a mere bit of 
bread and butter may taste when eaten from the low, green 
table, the general enchantment of place and scene giving 
an added flavor. 

June is the ideal time for picnics ; in this month there 
are so many perfect days, when none should work, but all 
should play, that one is prompted to plan for a little fun 
and frolic, including an informal 

Straw Ride, 

which shall form part of the programme of the entertain- 
ment. Choose for the ride a large, roomy wagon, remove 

333 




Going on a straw-ride picnic. 



534 



A Straw- Ride Picnic 



335 



all the seats except the one reserved for the driver, and fill 
the bottom of the vehicle with plenty of fresh, clean straw. 
Let all the party be seated on this, have within reach 
warm wraps for protection in case of cooler weather or a 
shower ; and stow the luncheon away under the seat of the 
driver. The horse should not be too spirited for such an 
occasion, and the driver must be a strong, reliable man who 
understands perfectly the management of the reins. Thus 
equipped, with two or three grown persons in charge, the 
girls and boys may throw care to the winds and enjoy their 
ride over hill and dale, through sweet meadows and along 
leafy lanes dappled with golden sunshine; again on the 
highway, past field and wood, driving gayly along until the 
picnic ground is reached. 

Should the ride be more than a mile or two, the way 
may be beguiled with gay songs and choruses, or games in 
which all may join while sitting quietl}'' in their places. 
Such a game is the old one 



"Simon Says." 

It is played with the hands only ; each 
person doubles up his right hand, resting 
it on his lap and allowing his thumb to 
stand erect (Fig. 562). When all are in 
position the leader calls out: "Simon 
says ' Thumbs down,'" at the same time 
turning his thumb downward (Fig. 563). 
All follow his example ; then comes the 
bidding " Thumbs up," and many will 
resume the first position before they 
realize that the leader omitted to prefix 
the order with "Simon says." Therein 




Fig. 562. — Simon says 
" Thumbs up." 



336 



Recreation for Girls 




Fig. 563. — Simon says "Thumbs 
down." 



lies the catch, for no command must be obeyed unless it 
comes from Simon. 

The leader proceeds with " Simon says, 'Thumbs up,' " 
then up must go all thumbs, and when " Simon says * Wig- 
gle waggle,' " all move their thumbs 
from side to side while the hand 
rests in position (Fig. 564) — dotted 
lines show the swing of the thumb. 
If any neglect to do so it counts 
one against him ; next comes the 
order " Stop " ; the thumbs con- 
tinuing to wag, the leader calls 
" Simon says ' Thumbs stop.' " The 
leader may command a change in 
the position and movement of the 
hand and thumb according to his fancy, but the hand 
cannot be unclasped nor the thumb folded down during 
the game. Three failures count the player out, and he 
must then content himself with watching the others until 
the play ends. The leader, being privileged, follows all 

directions in order to confuse ,.- 

the others. The game is short, 
consisting of ten commands 
from the leader. It may be 
played with sides, the group 
dividing into two parties ; the 
young people at one end of the 
wagon form one side, while 
those at the other end consti- 
tute the other side. The party 
losing fewest players wins the 
game. 




Fig. 564. 



-Simon says "Wiggle 
waggle." 



A Straw-Ride Picnic 337 

Another interesting amusement, easily payed as the 
wagon rolls along, is the 

" Bird Wish." 

At a given signal each boy and girl must close both eyes 
tight and make a wish, not opening the eyes until the leader 
calls out '* Look," when all may scan the blue heavens and 
the surrounding country in search of birds. The first to 
discover one cries out " Bird," which insures the fulfilment 
of the wish. The other players are obliged to try again. 
There being but three chances in this game, only three of 
the company can be sure of successful wishes. 

If more diversions are needed during the drive, try the 
following 

Word Tangle. 

Ask each boy and girl to repeat in turn these lines: 

" She says she sells sea-shells ; 
Shall she sell sea-shells? " 

The words must not be recited too slowly, as that would 
spoil the sport. Let the verse be said a trifle faster than 
ordinary speech. The tongues of most of the players will 
probably become twisted, causing the words to sound unin- 
telligible to the rest of the company, and a hearty laugh 
will follow the effort. Only one trial is accorded each 
player. When the line has gone the rounds, repeat in the 
same manner : 

" Fred fetched freshly fried flying fish." 

These little trials of skill in speech not only give you much 
fun, but at the same time they cure hesitancy of speech and 
brighten the mind; but do not let that frighten you and 



338 Recreation for Girls 

deter you from profiting by the sport. Never be afraid of 
advantageous learning ; let it come in what guise it may, it 
will surely add to your pleasure as well as your worth. 

When the picnic grounds are reached and all have had 
time to look about, everyone will be ready for exercise. 
So prepare for a grand rush after one of the group chosen as 

The "Deer," 

who, stepping directly in front of the others, calls " Ready," 
when the group standing still immediately sings to the air 
of " Yankee Doodle," 

" My heart is in the Highlands, 
My heart isn't here. 
My heart is in the Highlands, 
Chasing the deer." 

At the word *' ready " the " deer " starts to run, and as the 
pursuers cannot follow until the song is ended, the "deer" 
has time to get a certain distance ahead before the others 
give chase ; this they do as they sing the last word in the 
verse. The "deer" runs a short distance, circles around 
and returns to the starting-point, or " home" as it is called, 
the followers endeavoring to catch him before he reaches 
his goal. 

After resting from this game bring the rope from its 
hiding-place in the wagon, also the long board stowed away 
flat against the side of the vehicle, and in less time than 
you imagine the rope can be securely fastened on a strong 
branch of a tree to serve as 

A Swing, 

while the board may be used for a " Teeter-tarter " ; bal- 
ance the plank across a log or the lower bars of a fence ; 



A Straw-Ride Picnic 339 

then when two players take their seats at the ends of the 
board, if it is properly adjusted, they will rise and sink alter- 
nately as the ends move up and down, keeping time as the 
players sing : 

" Teeter-tarter, bread and water, 
Come and see the pretty daughter." 

" See-saw, Margery Daw, 
Came to town to study law. " 

If the players are of unequal weight, the heavier one 
shortens his half of the plank by shoving it along farther 
across the fence or log, preserving in this way the equilib- 
rium. To start the " Teeter-tarter " one of the players 
should give a slight spring upward with the feet while re- 
taining his sitting posture on the board. 

Prepare 

The Dinner 

early, as the brisk drive in the morning air tends to stimu- 
late the appetite. Bring the lunch-boxes to the place se- 
lected for the meal ; let one person take full charge and 
give directions, while the others unpack, build the fire, and 
go to the spring for water. 

The lunch should have been packed in paper boxes, to 
avoid the care of baskets. In the first box might be the 
loaves of fresh uncut bread and a tin baking-powder can of 
sweet butter, the bread to be cut into thin slices, buttered 
and prepared for sandwiches of various kinds. These can 
be easily made by adding either the chopped nuts that have 
been packed in a separate small box, or crisp lettuce leaves 
which have been detached from the stalk, well cleaned and 
sprinkled with fresh water, then carefully placed by them- 
selves in a box lined with waxed or oiled paper such as is 



340 



Recreation for Girls 





used by confectioners for sweetmeats. Or the sandwiches 
may be of sliced ham, tongue, roast-beef or lamb, each kind 
of meat being folded in waxed paper and packed in its own 
box. When the different articles of food are managed in 
this way they are much more attractive and 
palatable, each retaining its own flav^or, and 
there is no danger of their being mashed and 
jumbled together, as happens too often when the 
dinner is indifferently arranged and put together 
in a thoughtless manner. 

The best way to carry salt, pepper, etc., is to 
put each into a small paper box, the salt in one 
of cylindrical form, the lid of which has pre- 
viously been punched full of holes with the aid 
of a tack or a slender wire nail (Fig. 565). The 
pepper can be in a smaller and differently shaped box, and 
sugar in a box of still another size and shape, that there 
may be no chance of mistaking one for the other and cover- 
ing the meat with sugar or trying to sweeten 
the lemonade with salt. The perforations in 
the lid of the pepper-box must be quite small; 
punch them with a large-sized needle. After 
the boxes are filled the lids can be fastened 
securely with strong paste and, before they are 
packed, may have paper tied down over the 
tops (Fig. 566), to preclude all chance of the 
contents sprinkling out during the journey. 

If mustard is needed, it should be pre- 
pared at home and carried in a small, wide- 
mouthed bottle. ]Ma3'onnaise dressing is best conveyed 
corked up in a small stone china jar, such as is often used 
for jam. 

Boiled, fried, or broiled chicken is alwa^'S acceptable at 




Fig. 566. 

Paper over the 

top. 



A Straw-Ride Picnic 



o 



41 



a picnic dinner ; the chicken must be well cooked, cut into 
pieces and each portion wrapped in a separate piece of 
waxed paper, then packed together in a box. Cold-boiled 
asparagus or string beans, with fresh lettuce and mayon- 
naise dressing, may take the place of a meat salad if desired. 

Fruit is very refreshing and always welcome if consisting 
of fresh berries, cherries, etc. ; pack it in the same manner 
as lettuce, omitting the sprinkling and washing. 

Of course, young people do not care for coffee, but the 
grown ones would like it, and they must be remembered. 
Grind the coffee and mix with raw Ggg\ it may then be 
carried in the tin coffee-pot, the coffee to be made after the 
grounds are reached. If cake is taken, do not let it be rich; 
sponge or plain cup-cake, made in layers with apple-sauce 
between, is best. 

As far as possible have the table equipment of paper, 
that it may not be necessary to carry it back home. A table- 
cloth composed of large sheets of smooth white wrapping- 
paper will answer the purpose very well. Paper plates 
such as are used by bakers, make excellent substitutes 
for china ones and are 
the very thing for outing 
parties. Spoons may be 
home-made, whittled of 
wood ; should the bowls 
of the spoons prove too 
difHcult to manage, make 
them like small shovels 
(Fig. 567). If time will 




Fig. 567. — Picnic wooden-spoon. 




Fig. 568. — Flat sticks to use as spoons. 



not allow of this, flat, smooth sticks larger at one end than 
the other (Fig. 568) may take their place. Knives are not 
absolutely necessary. Only one need be taken, but that 
must be of good size and sharp, to be used for cutting 



342 Recreation for Girls 

bread. It is a mistake to carry fine table linen or silver, 
they always prove a great care and are apt to be injured 
or lost, but not being skilled in the art of eating with chop- 
sticks, like the Chinese, you will have to be supplied with 
forks. Take barely enough for the purpose and have them 
of the most inexpensive quality ; then it will not matter if 
one or two happen to be lost. Only a few cups will be 
required and no saucers; the company can take turns using 
the cups. One item more — a pail for the water. 
A small 

Camp-fire 

is very important. Build it on a spot where there is not 
the slightest danger of its spreading, and into the embers 
and ashes roll small raw potatoes. They will be delicious 
baked — velvety black on the outside and, when broken 
open while steaming hot, soft, mealy, and snowy white on 
the inside. Before boiling the coffee, pile a la\''er of flat 
stones on two sides of the fire and set the coffee-pot on 
them, bridging across the open space over the fire. Water 
can be heated in this way for tea or chocolate. 

After luncheon gather all the boxes and paper and burn 
them in the camp-fire, being careful not to put too much on 
the fire at a time and waiting until one portion is burned 
before adding more. The paper should be rolled in small, 
tight balls to prevent a possible breeze from wafting it in 
the air. 

All can join in feeding the fire and enjoy 

The Game 

which accompanies it. When each one has secured his 
contribution of box or paper, all must stand around the fire 
and in turn cast the fuel on the flames. The first to do so 



A Straw-Ride Picnic 343 

begins telling- any kind of an original tale which imagination 
may suggest, such as, 

" The Prince, arrayed in gorgeous and rich apparel, was about to enter 
his crystal palace when " 

There he stops, because the rules of the game do not allow 
one person to speak longer than his paper burns, but un- 
til it is consumed he must not cease talking. The next in 
turn drops her paper on the flame and continuing the 
story, says, 

"he was startled by a peculiar noise from the grove near by. Rushing to 
discover the cause, he saw something dark moving among the trees, it turned 
and slowly approached " 

Her paper having completely burned, the third player takes 
up the plot, and tossing his box on the glowing coals, says, 

" Nearer and nearer the something came, when, lo ! it proved to be a baby 
bear walking erect and carrying in his paws " 

So it goes on, and everyone adding a little, the story grows. 
Each player being at liberty to turn the romance to suit his 
mind, the story is apt to assume sudden and comical 
changes, giving it a peculiar charm both to those who take 
part and to those who listen. 

A short, quiet time with jack-stones, played with small 
stones found on the ground, will allow of sufficient rest be- 
fore participating in the exhilarating sport of 



" Menagerie." 

In this choose a keeper, whose duty it is to give the name of 
a different animal to each player. Then all must form in 
line for the grand march. Headed by the keeper, the pro- 



344 Recreation for Girls 



cession twists and winds through the trees, this way and 
that, returning soon to the starting-point, when all join 
hands, forming a circle around the keeper who is then 
blindfolded, .,. The circle spins merrily around until the 
keeper calls out " Jungle," the signal for all the players to 
shout in chorus, each one giving the cry of the animal 
he represents. After that they stand perfectly still. The 
keeper next calls to one of the animals to enter the cage. 
The player named must break from the circle and, standing 
within the ring, gently give the cry peculiar to the animal 
represented, at the same time changing his position so that 
the keeper may not be able to catch him, as the latter tries 
to do, guided by the cry. If the keeper succeeds at the 
first trial, the two change places, and the game commences 
over again, but without the march. Should the keeper not 
be able to catch the animal in his first attempt, the bandage 
must be removed from his eyes, and the circle standing 
clasping hands and elevating them high in air, give space 
for the animal to dart out of the cage, followed by the 
keeper. In and out of the circle they run, going not more 
than three times around the ring ; if in that time the keeper 
does not succeed in capturing his game, he must again be 
blindfolded and stand in the middle of the ring while the 
game continues. If captured, the animal becomes the 
keeper and the keeper the animal. 

Only a short while will remain before it will be time for 
returning home, a few moments more for tumbling about 
close to Nature ; then comes the ride back home in the big 
wagon filled with gay and happy girls and boys. 



CHAPTER XXX 




A PAPER CHASE 



UN! Wh}^ what can compare with 
it? The clear frosty air is full 
of life, the blood is rushing tu- 
multuously through your veins 
and your feet are tingling to be 
off on the chase. It is healthful, 
it is inspiring, it is glorious fun. 
You must think, too, in order to 
be successful either as hare or 
hound, for the object of each is 
to outwit the other, and Paper 
Chase is a game that requires the 
use of brains as well as muscle. 



The Hares and Hounds 

compose the part}-. Two hares and as many hounds as 
you will, the more the merrier. Each hare must carry a 
bag filled with paper cut into small strips. The hounds 
carrj^ only the weight of their responsibility to entrap and 
catch the hares. 



The Game 

is a countr}^ game, of course. Who would think of the hares 
and hounds dashing in a mad run through the streets of 

345 




Over Fences. 
346 



A Paper Chase 347 

town or village. And it is a noisy game with the Kee-ooi ! 
Kee-ooi ! of the fleeing hares, and answering La-ha-hoo, 
La-ha-hoo ! of the pursuing hounds. 

Select a convenient club-house or residence for the 
meet and let there be two hares and at least six hounds. 

The first thing to be decided upon is the distance of the 
run, which should not be too great, especially for beginners. 
The next is the agreement between the hares upon a general 
plan to be pursued in their tactics, which must be kept secret 
from the hounds. 

The morning hours are best for the game, and a hearty 
appetite for lunch, or the hunt-breakfast, it might be called, 
is the result. 

At a Given Time 

let the hares start off together, scattering their bits of paper 
as they go, to be followed ten or fifteen minutes later 
by the hounds, who are led by the paper on the tracks 
of the hares. 

The object of the hares is so to scatter the paper in their 
cross-country run as to lead the hounds on 

A False Scent. 

This is sometimes done by the hares making a detour into 
a field, doubling back on their tracks and running in quite 
another direction. Or they may provide a number of false 
scents leading from one point. 

To be sure all this uses up much precious time, but the 
compensation lies in mystifying and delaying the hounds, 
each of whom must decide for herself which trail is the 
most likely to prove the one the hares have really taken. 
When 



348 Recreation for Girls 



The Hares Are Off 

and the fifteen minutes up, the hounds must start in pur- 
suit. Their object is to head off and catch the liares be- 
fore the}' can cover the given distance and again reacli 
the place of meeting. A hound must not only come in 
sight of a hare but must touch her in order to make a 
catch. Each player in the paper chase acts for herself, and 
if she succeeds in catching a hare she wins the honors. 
And a hare reaching home without being caught wins great 
honor. The hares keep together, but the hounds may 
scatter at will, though no girl should risk going too far 
alone. 

From time to time the hares must give their cry Kee-ooi ! 
Kee-ooi ! that the hounds may not go too far astray, and the 
hounds reply with their La-ha-hoo ! to let the hares know 
they are on their tracks. 

Over Fences, Across Brooks, 

taking to the cover of the woods, or speeding along the 
roads, it matters little how you get there, the object is to 
reach the point you have decided upon over the shortest 
route and in the least possible time. 

This is the fun of it, the wild scramble over all obstacles 
and the exultant moment when, if a hound, you have run 
down the hares or, if a hare, you outwit the hounds and 
make the home-run in safety. The game requires good 
generalship on both sides, quick thought and ready de- 
cision. 

How to Dress. 

A short skirt, loose, stout walking shoes, and a sweater 
make the most comfortable costume. Wraps will be found 



A Paper Chase 349 

in the way and uncomfortably warm, and you cannot run 
very well in overshoes. If j^our feet get wet keep on 
running and you will not take cold, but have a change 
of foot-wear read}^ that you may replace wet shoes and 
stockings with dry ones as soon as you reach the house. 
Also throw a wrap over you upon your return so that you 
may not cool off too suddenly after your long run. 

Light bags for the hares to carry may be made of cotton 
cloth with straps of the same to throw over the shoulder. 

Good health, good-fellowship, good-nature, and fair play 
are the requisites for the complete enjoyment of this most 
exhilarating of all games. 



INDEX 



Adjusting warp, 19 
African hut, 306 
Alligators, clay, 193 
Amusements, Mayday, 237 
Andirons, 142 
Anemones, 296 
Angling, Easter, 231 
Animals, tissue-paper, 75 
Apple, Indian, 209 
Apple, Jap, 211 
Apple-seeds, 261 
Apple tower, 214 
Apple toys, 206 
Arch, door, 177 
Armor, alligator, 197 
Arrow-heads, 122 
Arrow-shaft, 123 
Arrows for Mayday, 238 
Assumption, Cathedral of, 175 

B 

Baby alligators, 193 
Bag, school, 31 
Bags, fortune, 262 
Ball game. May, 251 
Ball of twine, 27 
Banana, clay, 201 
Band, spinning-wheel, 8 

To adjust, 9 
Banners, Japanese fish, 171 
Barrel-hoop, 62 



Basket of shavings, 36 
Basket, to make wood, 62 
Basket, to weave splint, 68 
Baskets as moulds, 187 
Baskets, May, 248 
Beads, 182 
Bed, Japanese, 168 
Beds, blankets for dolls', 26 
Bell and ball game, 251 
Bellows, 153 
Binding basket edges, 40 
Binding off, 7 1 
"Bird Wish," 337 
Birds, tissue-paper, 75, 93 
Birds, to feed, 267 
Bird's head, finger, 277 
Birthday festivals, 170 
Blackbirds, finger, 280 
Blanket, Navajo, 20, 125 

Doll's bed, 26 
Blood root, 296 
Blouse, Russian, 181 
Boats, rose petals, 320 
Body, alligator, 196 
Bonnet, war, 116 
Bonnetwire stem, 95 
Boots, Russian, 182 
Bouquet-holder, 58 
Bow, 124 
Bow case, 124 
Bowls, 292 

Bows for Mayday amusements, 237 
Breakfast, Japan, 168 



351 



352 



Index 



Broom, show, 172 
"Build the Tower," 282 
Butt, rifle, 152 
Button-mould, 171 



Calumet, 119 
Calyx, tissue-paper, 96 
Camp-fire, 342 
Cap, rose petal, 328 
Card-board, pot hooks of, 145 
Carnation-pink, 86, 87 
Case, handkerchief, 41 
Cathedral of Assumption, 176 
"Chai, " Russian, 181 
Chamois skin gown, 125 
Chase, paper, 345 
Chicken, tissue-paper, 75 
Chieftain's shield, 120 
Children, talking, 268 
Chimney samovar, 184 
"Chin Chopper Chin," 282 
Churn, 160 
Circle, to cut a, SS 
Clay, 187 

Clay alligators, 193 
Cleaning for spinning-wheel, 8 
Cloak, old colonial, 155 
Cloth, magic, 264 
Clothes-line, possibilities of, 162 
Clover, four-leaved, 260 
Coat of armor, alligator, 197 
Coiled pottery, 187 
Colonial kitchen, toy, 133 
Colorless vases, 292 
Combinations, flower, 291 
Common grasses, 53 
Conventional designs, 330 
Cork churn lid, 160 



Counter, store, 308 
Cradle, papoose, 130 
Crane, 137 
Crazy bull, 116 
Crosses, paper, 1 78 
Crowding, flower, 290 
Cupola, Russian cathedral, 178 
Curtain-bee frolic, 48 
Curtain, sash, 34 
Curtains, primitive reed, 43 



D 



Daffodil, tissue-paper, 99 

Dance, egg, 230 

Dasher, churn, 160 

"Deer," 338 

Design, ornamental, 67 

Designs, conventional, 330 

Dinner, straw ride, 339 

Distaff, 7 

Doll, Japanese, 174 

Doll, Russian, 180 

Dolls' beds, blankets for, 26 

Dolls, feast of, 172 

Dolls' hammock, 56 

Dolls, new race of, 103 

Door-way, Russian cathedral, 177 

Door-way screens, 149 

Dress, Mary's, 217 

Dress, May-pole to, 252 

Dress, Miss Muffet's, 108 

Dress, paper-chase, 348 

Dutch windmill, 214 



Eagle feather of paper, 121 
Easter egg games. 227 
Edges, basket, 40 



Index 



353 



Egg games, 227 
Elephant, tissue-paper, 83 
Encampment, Indian, iii 
End-pieces, 63 
Face, Miss Muffet's, 106 



False scent, 347 

Faucet, samovar, 182 

Feast of dolls, 172 

Feather, eagle paper, 121 

Feathers, for goose, 221 

Fence, paper, 168 

Fenced in garden, 168 

Ferns, 297 

Festivals, Japanese, 169 

Finger church, 275 

Finger plays, 273 

Finger steeple, 275 

Fire, tissue-paper, 114 

Fireplace, 138 

Fish, Japanese paper, 170 

Five little pigs, 285 

Flax, 10 

Flintlock rifle, 151 

Floors, Japan paper house, 167 

Floral tent, 307 

Florida playhouse, 298 

Floor, colonial kitchen, 136 

Flower lifter, 294 

Flowers, to arrange, 289 

Folks, finger plays for little, 273 

Food, alligator, 198 

Fortune bags, 262 

Four-leaved clover, 260 

Fresh flowers, to arrange, 289 

Fringe, to make hammock, 30 

Frog, jumping, 264 

Frolic, curtain-bee, 48 



Frolic with roses, 320 
Funny little apple toys, 206 



Games, egg, 227 

Garden, fenced in, 168 

Garden, rose girls, 325 

Germantown wool for Navajo blanket, 

20 
Ghost writing, 259 
Girl, rose, 323 
Gold nuggets, 254 
Good Indian, 115 
Goose, Mother Goose's, 220 
Gown, chamois skin, 125 
Grass, napkin ring, 59 
Grasses, common, 53 
Grasshopper house, 53 
Green leaf boat, 322 
Green leaves, 291 
Groceries, 312 
Gun, flintlock, 151 

H 

Hallowe'en revels, 259 

Hammock, dolls', 56 

Handkerchief case, 41 

Handle, basket, 40 

Handle, churn, 160 

Hares, 345 

Hut, African, 306 

Hat, witch's, 257 

Head, Washington, 202 

Headdress, Indian, 116 

Heddles, how to make loom, 1 7 

Hepaticas, 296 

Hibiscus, 86 

Holder, bouquet, 58 



354 



Index 



Home-like rag rug, 154 

Home-made loom, weaving on, 15 

Hooks, pot, 145 

Hounds, 345 

Houses, Japan paper, 162 

House, grasshopper, 53 

Hub, spinning-wheel, 149 

Indian apple, 209 

Indian Encampment, iii 

Indian pot, 143 

Indian tra vols, 118 

Jap apple, 210 

Japan, paper houses of, 162 

Japanese doll, 174 

Japanese paper, 162 

Japanese umbrella, 173 

Jars, flower, 293 

Jumping frog, 264 

K 

Kago, 172 

Keeping store, 308 

King, May, 245 

Kitchen, toy colonial, 133 

Kneading clay, 187 

Knitting needle, gun-barrel, 152 

"Knives and Forks," "Here arc mv 

Mother's," 279 
Koi, Japanese, 171 
Kremlin, 175 



Lake, open air, 323 
Lamb, Mary's, 219 
Lanterns, paper, 1 67 
Leather boots, 181 
Leaves, green, 291 
Leaves, tissue-paper, 193 
Legs, alligator, igS 



Lifter, flower, 294 

Lifting for pasch eggs, 227 

Line, clothes, 62 

Lingerie, Miss Muffet's, 107 

Little apple toys, 206 

Little bellows, 153 

Litde Miss Muffet, 103 

Little paper houses, \ 62 

Little pigs, famous live, 285 

Loom, weaving on home-made, 15 

M 

Magic cloth, 264 

Marvel pictures, 215 

Mary, 215 

Material, reed curtain, 43 

Mats, table, 41 

May baskets, 248 

Mayday amusements, 237 

May-pole, 252 

Menagerie, game of, 343 

Miniature cathedral, 176 

Miss Muffet, tissue-paper, 103 

Moccasins, 117 

Modelling in tissue-paper, 75 

Money, store, 314 

Morning glory, tissue-paper, 86, 94 

Mother Goose's goose, 220 

Mother's knives and forks, 280 

N 

Navajo blanket, 20 
Navajo blankets, 125 
Nail, staple, 46 
Napkin-ring, grass, 59 
Nasturtiums, 290 
Nature study, tissue-paper, 86 
Netting, rope, 65 
Nuggets, gold, 254 



Index 



355 



o 

Odd things in Russia, 175 
Odd utensils, 144 
Odd colonial clock, 155 
Old-fashioned flintlock rifle 
Old oaken bucket, 250 
Open air lake, 323 
Open air play houses, 298 
Ornamental design, 67 
Oven, 139 



Paint, for Japan houses, 165 

Painting, rose petals for, 328 

Paper chase, 345 

Paper houses of Japan, 162 

Paper lanterns, 167 

Paper modelling, in tissue, 75 

Paper, store wrapping, 313 

Papoose, 130 

Parker, Thankful, 146 

Party, rose girls, 326 

Pasch eggs, 227 

Pattern, blanket, 24 

"Peel," 144 

Pet turtle, 327 

Pewter ware, 154 

Picnic, straw ride, j^j^-i, 

Pictures, marvel, 215 

Pigs, five little, 285 

Pin loom, how to make, 16 

Pine-shavings, 36 

Pipe of peace, 119 

Play house, open air, 298 

Plays, finger, 273 

Pocketbooks, store, 314 

Pole, May, 252 

Possibilities of a clothes-line, 62 

Pot hooks, 145 



^51 



Pot, iron, 143 

Pottery, 185 

Practice on spinning-wheel, 1 1 

Primitive reed curtains, 43 



Queen May, 245 
Queer little teeter-tarter, 

R 



73 



Race of dolls, new, 103 

Rag rug, home-like, 154 

Rare frolic, 320 

Reed curtains, primitive, 43 

Revels, Hallowe'en, 254 

Rice ball, 171 

Rifle, 151 

Ring, grass napkin, 59 

"Rock," 7 

Roll, clay, 189 

Roll of splint, 68 

Rolling, egg, 235 

Roof, Russian cathedral, 177 

Rookwood pottery, 187 

Rope netting, 65 

Rose girl, 323 

Rose petal boats, 320 

Rug, 154 

Rules, pasch game, 234 

Russia, odd things in, 175 

Russian doll, 180 



Sally Walker's hood, 
Samovar, 182 
Sash-curtain, 34 
Scales, store, 309 
Scent, false, 347 



356 



Index 



School-boy, 31 

Screens, doorway, 49 

Seed-top grasses, 61 

Shafts, arrow, 123 

Shapes, pottery, 192 

Shavings, armful of, 36 

Shield, Indian, 120 

Shoes, Miss Muffet's, 107 

Shovel, 144 

Shuttle, 19 

Sides, to weave basket, 39 

"Simon Says," 335 

Spindle, 5 

Spindle-frame, 5 

Spinning, 3 

Spinning wheel, 3 

Spinning wheel, colonial kitchen, 147 

Splint basket, to weave, 68 

Splint, roll of, 68 

Spokes, splint basket, 69 

Staple-nail, 46 

Straw, bonnet wire, 95 

Store, keeping, 308 

Stories, telling, 343 

Stoves, Russian, 180 

Straw ride, 333 

Straw ride picnic, 333 

Study, tissue-paper, nature, 86 

Sun-bonnet, Mary's, 218 

Sun-bonnet, Miss Muffet's, no 

Supplies, store, 312 

Supplies, straw ride picnic, 341 

Swift dog, 116 

Swing, 338 

Symmetry, 295 



Talking children, 268 

Tangle, word, 337 

Targets, Mayday, 240 

Tassels, 66 

Tea, how Russians make, 188 

Teeter tarter, 273 

Tenor, singing, 269 

Tent, floral, 317 

Thankful Parker, 146 

Things to make of common grasses, 

53 
Thread, when broken, 1 2 
Time-piece, old fashioned, 159 
Tinfoil, 153 

Tissue paper, moulding in, 75 
Toaster, 144 
Tomahawk, 120 
Tools, moulding, 188 
Tower, apple, 214 
Tower, finger, 282 
Toy colonial kitchen, 133 
Toys, apples, 206 
Toys, tissue-paper, 75 
Transparent vases, 292 
Travois, to make, 118 
Tree, Indian encampment, 129 
Trimming, 73 
Trousers, Russian, 181 
Turkey, tissue-paper, 81 
Turning eagle, 116 
Turtle, pet, 327 
Twine, what may be made of ball of, 27 



U 



Table egg rolling, 235 
Table mats, 41 
Table, moulding, 188 



Umbrella, Japanese, 173 
Umbrella play house, 299 
Uprights, spindle-frame, 5 
Utensils, colonial kitchen, 144 



Index 



357 



V 

Variety of candy, 317 
Vases, 292 
Vases,' colorless, 292 
Violets, 296 

W 

Walker, Sally, 208 

Wampum, 131 

War bonnet, 116 

Ware, pewter, 154 

Warp, to adjust, 19 

Washington, clay head of, 202 

Weavers, 68 

Weaving on home-made loom, 15 

Weaving splint basket, 70 

Weights, clock, 159 

Wheel, spinning, 3 

White-ash splint, 74 



Wig, Miss Muffet's, 106 

Wigwam, play-house, 301 

Wigwam, to make, 112 

Wild flowers, 295 

Wild violets 296 

Windmill, Dutch, 214 

Windows, Russian cathedral, 177 

Wing feathers, 222 

Wish, bird, 337 

Witch apple, 256 

Wood-basket, 62 

Wood chopper, finger, 277 

Word tangle, 337 

Woof, 20 

Wool, Germantown, 20 

Wrapping paper, 313 

Wreaths, rose petal, 331 



Zulu doll, 115 



THE BEARD BOOKS 
FOR GIRLS 

BY 

LINA AND ADELIA B. BEARD 



HANDICRAFT AND RECREATION FOR 
GIRLS 

By LiNA AND Adelia B. Beard. With illustrations. 8vo, $1.60 
net (postage extra). 

This new and elaborate book for girls, by Lina and Adelia Beard, 
whose previous books on girls' sports have become classic, combines a 
mass of practical instruction on handicrafts and recreations. The prac- 
tice of the handicrafts as here presented by the authors will be found as 
diverting as the recreations which make up the second half of the book. 
The subject-matter of both handicrafts and recreations is entirely new 
and offers a rich storehouse of amusement for summer days and winter 
evenings. The illustrations number over seven hundred text and full- 
page drawings, which elucidate the text in the most informing way. No 
more charming gift- book for girls could be desired. 

WHAT A GIRL CAN MAKE AND DO 

New Ideas for Work and Play. By Lina and Adelia B. Beard. 
With over 300 illustrations by the authors. Square 8vo, 
$1.60 net. 

"This book is filled full of ideas and drawings original with the 
authors themselves, and it would be a dull girl w^ho could not make 
herself busy and happy following its precepts. ... A most inspiring 
book for an active-minded girl." — Chicago Record-Herald. 

THE AMERICAN GIRL'S HANDY BOOK 

Or, How to Amuse Yourself and Others. By Lina and Adelia 
B. Beard. 14th Thousand. With more than 300 illustra- 
tions by the authors. Square 8vo, $2.00. 

"It is a treasure which, once possessed, no practical girl would will- 
ingly part with. It is an invaluable aid in making a home attractive, 
comfortable, artistic, and refined." — Grace Greenwood, 



/ 



Jb^J^VXV^^JJ^ 



THE BEARD BOOKS 

FOR BOYS ZV// 7 J. 

By DANIEL C. BEARD . A -»— 



" To make a good hook for boys, and more particularly a good book 
about boys' sports, one needs to be a good deal of a boy himself. Mr. 
D. C. Beard has just this qualification. He gets the boy's point of view, 
the boy's sense of fun, the boy's love for what is nevir, ingenious, or 
queer." — The Outlook. 



THE JACK OF ALL TRADES 

Or, New Ideas for American Boy.s. By Daniel C. Beard. Pro- 
fusely illustrated by the author. Square 8vo, $2.00. 

''Mr. Beard is a good deal of a boy himself, as all vi^ho know him 
realize. He has the boy's enthusiasm, the boy's love of out-of-door 
sports, and the boy's desire to make some new thing. This book is a 
capital one to give any boy for a present at Christmas, on a birthday, or 
indeed at any time. It tells how to make tree-top clnV) houses, boys' 
houseboats, switchbacks, liome-made circuses, panoramas, and dozens of 
other things." — The Outlook. 



THE OUTDOOR HANDY BOOK 

Foi* Playground, Field, and Forest. By D. C. Beard. New 
edition of "The American Boy's Book of Sport." Profusely 
illustrated. Square 8vo, $2.00. 

"It tells how to play all sorts of games with marbles, how to make 
and spin more kinds of tops thiin most boys ever heard of, how to make 
the latest things in plain and fancy kites, where to dig bait and how to 
fish, all about boats and sailing, and a host of other things which can be 
done outdoors. The volume is profusely illustrated and will be an 
unmixed delight to any boy." — New York Tribune. 



THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK 

Or, What To Do and How To Do It. By D. C Beard. 35th 
Thousand. Profusely illustrated. Square 8vo, $2.00. 

" The book has this great advantage over its predecessors, that most 
of the games, tricks, and other ainusemrmts described in it are new. It 
treats of sports adapted to all ."reasons of the year ; it is practical, and it 
is well illustrated."— iVcw; York Tribuue. 



nCT 1 4 1904 



